JP6528739B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and displacement with respect to the first displacement member Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine having a second displacement member.

JP, 2014-23874, A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the number of parts increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the number of parts.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, a first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and a second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member, which comprises, a connecting member you connecting the first displacement member and said base member, said second displacement member, said first The first displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member, and a concave portion is recessed in either one of the second displacement member and the coupling member, and the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving unit. The first displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position, and the other of the second displacement member or the coupling member is disposed inside the recess, whereby the displacement of the second displacement member is formed to be regulated. .

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a control unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of a regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along the line XXc-XXc in FIG. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the up-and-down displacement unit in XXII part of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the up-and-down displacement unit in the XXIIb-XXIIb line of Fig.22 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23 (b); (C) is sectional drawing of the up-and-down displacement unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line of FIG.23 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a decoration member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a decoration member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a) FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit in line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. (A) is a front view of a front cover, (b) is the elements expanded sectional view of the front cover in the XXXIb-XXXIb line | wire of Fig.31 (a). (A) is a top view of a reflecting plate, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the reflecting plate in the XXXIIb-XXXIIb line | wire of Fig.32 (a). (A) is a top view of a rotation unit, FIG.33 (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in the XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb line | wire of (a). (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the rotation unit in the XXXIV part of FIG.33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of FIG. 39 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 39 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a), (c) is a view It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVc-XLVc line | wire of 43, (d) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the control unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of a regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc of FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are sectional views of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIa-LIIIa line | wire of FIG. 52, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIb-LIIIb line | wire of FIG.52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the distribution apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVb-LVb line | wire of FIG. 55 (a), (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line | wire of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification. (A) And (b) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where the decoration member is arranged at the third position, (b) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where the decoration member is arranged at the second position (C) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where a decoration member is arranged at the 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where a decoration member is arranged at the 2nd position. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where a decoration member is arranged at the 2nd position, (b) is a rear view of a gear. (A) And (b) is a perspective front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a top view of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the state where the decoration member is arranged at the second position, (b) is a top view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the arrow LXVIIb direction view of FIG. . (A) is a top view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a state in which displacement of the displacement unit is restricted, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the up-and-down displacement unit along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a base unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the base unit in the LXXb-LXXb line | wire of Fig.70 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a base unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the LXXIIb-LXXIIb line | wire of Fig.72 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the LXXIVb-LXXIVb line | wire of FIG. 74 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a up-and-down displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a slide unit. It is a side view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a side view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a side view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A), (c), (e) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit, (b), (d), (f) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are rear views of a vertical displacement unit. (A) to (c) are rear views of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 12th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LXXXIXa-LXXXIXa in FIG. 88 (b), and FIG. 89 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit as a modification, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the up-and-down displacement unit taken along line XCIb-XCIb in FIG. 80 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit as a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 2, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to create more refreshingness, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of reference). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 has a winning. The pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful in the lottery (a jackpot lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally medium is a gaming state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased) which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction.

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is open is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized product 640a is in the opened state (opened state), the second winning opening 640 is compared to the case where the first motorized object 640a is closed (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 or changing the opening time of the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized product 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during the normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 640 a may be changed. In addition, the first motorized symbol 640a and the second motorized symbol 82 are opened at one time or during the time when the first motorized symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened during a definite change or during a time cut. The number of times it does not occur may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning of any of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and the second symbol is variable display triggered by the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs.

  Further, a center frame 600 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  In the second symbol display device, each time the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) are displayed for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “o”), the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first electric combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the player to get to the 640 and the third winning opening, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gates 66, 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured to allow passage of a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls fired to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gates 66 and 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol holding lamp (FIG. The display is also lit (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to four times, and is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) Also good. Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 640 a. The first motorized product 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the first motorized product 640a is in the closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, 67, the first motorized role thing The state 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” tends to be displayed, and the number of times the first motorized accessory 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motorized component 640a is open is also longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation or during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640 a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Shoot the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80, and get a lot of chances for the jackpot lottery by winning the first prize port 64 and aim to become the jackpot, It is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67 during the definite change or during the short time, the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state. Since it is easy to win, the ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 toward the second winning port 640, and the first through gate 66, 67 is passed and the first It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 as well as opening the electric role product 640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (is it in the process of being changed, is in the middle of a short time, is in the normal state). Can change the way of Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Below the first winning opening 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 457.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. As shown in FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that in FIG. 7, displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions, and in FIG. 8, displacements disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400. The state in which the members 430 are respectively displaced to the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 is provided with a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 300, the vertical displacement unit 400 is upward and the light emission decoration is downward The units 800 are respectively disposed.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 has a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view disposed on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a displacement member 430 and a decoration member disposed displaceably on the rear base 420. And a projecting position for projecting the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. It can be displaced between the positions (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the rotating unit 500 is disposed on the decorative member 450, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated, and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the rotating unit 500 is made to emit light so that the residual image of the light is patterned And can be displayed. Details of the structure will be described later.

  The light emission decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

  Next, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emission decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shape in a front view, a back base 420 superimposed on the back side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. The drive motor 441 disposed at the top, the displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and one end side of the displacement member 430 are coupled to one end of the displacement member 430 to move vertically (FIG. ), The front cover 460 disposed forward of one end side of the front base 410, and the gap between the facing of the front cover 460 and the front base 410 Guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the side wall member 470, a side wall member 470 disposed at an end of the decorative member 450 in the lateral direction to restrict displacement of the decorative member 450, and a front surface of the front base 410 A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, all members except the decorative member 450 are arranged in a pair in left-right symmetry, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of facing members. Further, the detailed description of the members disposed in a pair only describes the members disposed on the left side in the front view (the left side in FIG. 9), and the members disposed on the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. The same reference numerals as those of the left side member in front view are attached, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in a front view, and a first piece 410X that forms the long side of the substantially L-shape and a short side that forms the substantially L-shape The two pieces 410Y are mainly provided.

  The extending direction of the first piece 410X is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has a standing portion 412 erected on the front side of the lateral outer end (left end), an upper concave groove 413 concaved in a circular arc shape at the upper portion, and a lower cross section An arc-shaped lower groove 414 is mainly provided.

  The upright portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 described later to restrict the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from the upper portion to the lower portion of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 to be described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed such that the shafts formed in a semicircular arc shape in cross section are located on the same straight line, and from the upper end of the upper concave groove 413 to the lower concave groove 414. The distance between the opposing ends to the lower end of the guide rod is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a longitudinally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at its central portion, an engaging portion 415 protruding on the back side, and a pivot portion 416 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. It is formed in preparation for the main.

  The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and the transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 from the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed through the opening 411, so that the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 comprises the front base 410 and the back base 420. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is disposed on the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 in a state of being disposed between the two faces, it is possible to simplify and reduce the man-hours at the time of parts replacement. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be reliably fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability at the time of component replacement can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and the protruding tip is bent toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 It is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 about the axis by the projecting portion to the back side, and restrict the displacement to the back side of the torsion spring SP1 by the bent portion of the tip.

  The pivot portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor for applying a drive force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and is a transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the back base 420. , 443 can be transmitted.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and connected to the drive motor 441, and is disposed in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the axial hole fitted with the projection 417 of the front base 410, and the transmission is performed as described above. The gear 442 is disposed in mesh with the gear 442. Thus, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  Further, the transmission gear 443 is provided with a protrusion 443a that protrudes from the side surface on the back side. The protrusion 443 a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and disposed at the outer peripheral edge portion of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, as described above, when the drive force is applied to the drive motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443 a is displaced in an arc shape around the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The back surface base 420 is a plate member formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front surface base 410, and includes an erected portion 421 erected on the front side at an outer edge portion.

  The erecting portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the facing of the front base 410 and the back base 420, and the erecting distance is greater than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443. It is set to a large size, and the front end face is disposed in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, it is possible to form a gap for arranging the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the displacement member 430, which will be described later, between the facing of the front base 410 and the back base 420.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a substantially box shape in which the outer edge portion protrudes to the back side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 circularly penetrated in the back and forth direction in the bent portion, a decoration side sliding hole 432 penetrated and formed in the front and back direction on one side of the long side, A drive side sliding hole 431 is formed on the other side in the front-rear direction, and a displacement side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protrusion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the pivoting portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivoting portion 416. Therefore, the front base 410 and the back base 420 are combined after the through hole 433 is inserted into the pivotal support portion 416 of the front base 410, so that the front base 410 can be displaced relative to the front base 410. It can be arranged in

  The drive side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. Further, the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the short side of the displacement member 430 in the longitudinal direction, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 is a driving force of the drive motor 441. When it is rotated, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides on the inside of the drive side sliding hole 431 with the displacement thereof, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, it is possible to cause the displacement member 430 to make displacement movement centering on the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole through which a support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape and disposed in a decoration member 450 described later is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a It is formed larger than. The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the long side of the displacement member 430 in the longitudinal direction. As described above, when the displacing member 430 is rotated about the through hole 433 as described above, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arc-shaped displacement locus centered on the through hole 433.

  The displacement side engagement portion 434 is a projection that engages the other end side of a torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed to protrude from the inner circumferential surface of the outer edge portion provided to project on the back side of the displacement member 430. In addition, the displacement side engaging portion 434 is formed on the side surface of the bending inner side of the displacement member 430 bent in a substantially L shape in a front view. As a result, the other end side of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the displacing side engaging portion 434 with the back side of the displacing member 430.

  The torsion spring SP1 has a torsion portion disposed around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (axial support portion 416 of the front base 410), and rotates leftward in a front view (vertical displacement unit around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430). One end side of the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the front view 400 is provided with the biasing force of the front view right rotation) to the engagement portion 415 of the front base 410 and the other end side is the displacement member The displacement side engaging portions 434 of 430 are engaged respectively. Thereby, the displacement member 430 rotates left around the axis of the through hole 433 (axial support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in a front view rotates right) Is always biased in the direction).

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured in a left-right pair, and a front base whose horizontal size is disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction The distance dimension between the left and right outer end portions of 410 is set to be the same.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in a front view with the lower side open, and includes a front base 452 that constitutes a central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 452, and a front base It is mainly provided with a back base 453 that covers the back of 452 and a rotation unit 500 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 is formed of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view and a laterally long rectangular shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent to the back side. The front base 452 has a support portion 452a projecting from the back side, an engaging portion 452b projecting to the front side from both lateral ends, and an abutting surface 452h smoothly formed on the front side of both lateral directions, And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-like body. Thereby, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441 and the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433 as a shaft, it is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 The support portion 452 a is displaced along with the displacement of the decoration-side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engaging portion 452 b is a protrusion with which the other end of the biasing spring SP 2 described later is engaged, and is protruded in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452 h is a smooth surface that contacts the roller 492 a of the restriction unit 490 described later, and is formed as a smooth surface on which the roller 492 a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface which inclines downward from the front side to the back side to the lower end portion of the abutting surface 452h. Thereby, the restriction unit 490 described later and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulating unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-like body having a rectangular cross-sectional shape extended in the vertical direction, and is disposed to be connected to the left and right end portions of the front base 452. In addition, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a opened in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circle having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  Thereby, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decoration member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is made by the sliding portions 451 disposed at both ends of the front base 452 It is regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by applying the driving force from the driving motor 441.

  The rear surface base 453 is a plate member that is disposed on the rear surface side of the front surface base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and the central portion of the front surface 452 has substantially the same outer size in front view. Thus, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably disposed in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453. In addition, a drive motor 457 that outputs a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the back surface of the back surface base 453. The detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410, and covers the front of the first piece 410X. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is provided with a standing wall 461 erected on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box-like body whose back side is open.

  The upright wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 protruding upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a concaved in a semicircular arc shape is formed on the back surface side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower concave groove 414 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 463a concaved in a semicircular arc shape is formed on the back side.

  The recessed grooves 462a and 463a are grooves into which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. In addition, while the recessed grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line, the axes recessed in a semicircular arc shape, the distance between facings from the upper end of the recessed groove 462a to the lower end of the recessed groove 463a is It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the recessed grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P may be held between the upper groove 413 and the groove 462a and the lower groove 414 and the groove 463a. Thus, the guide rod P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 so as not to come off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 into which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to come off the front base 410.

  Further, the distance between the front wall 460 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side in the left and right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the front wall 410 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, and the end portion of the sliding portion 451 outside in the left-right direction is disposed between the opposite. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends on the central side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and are formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like member bent to the rear side in a side view. Further, a wall surface bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on an end surface on the front side of the side wall member 470, and a restriction unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 has a pattern on the center side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 with irregularities, colors, etc. The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through the opening in the center of FIG. Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460 or the like) disposed outside in the left-right direction with respect to the side wall member 470 can be made invisible from the player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member in a front view, and an annular roller 481 having an axis in the front-rear direction on the back side is rotatably attached. In addition, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape approximately half that of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is disposed in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member for returning the rotation unit 500 to be described later to the initial position, and the contact between the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510 can define the initial position of the rotation unit 500.

  The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that couples the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward, and one end thereof is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412 b of the decorative member 450. Thus, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the central portion. Thereby, the length of the biasing spring SP2 can be secured, and it can be suppressed that the biasing force increases excessively.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

  FIGS. 15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 15 (a) is in a state of being disposed at the rising position, and FIG. 16 (a) is between the rising position and the lowering position. FIG. 17A corresponds to the state of being disposed at the lower position, respectively.

  15 (b) corresponds to FIG. 15 (a), FIG. 16 (b) corresponds to FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 17 (a). . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b), the state in which the back surface base 420 is removed is illustrated for ease of understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as "second position"), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side where the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is positioned inside the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radial outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  Further, in this state, the rotation direction on one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. Match That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points Form a state of Therefore, the displacement member 430 can not perform rotational movement about the through hole 433, and the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can suppress the rotational displacement of the displacement member 430.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and the transmission gears 443 are rotated, the projections 443a of the transmission gears 443 are the displacement members 430. By sliding the drive-side sliding hole 431, the left and right displacement members 430 are pushed downward.

  As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated about the axis of the through hole 433 as a rotation center, and as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward. From this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is disposed at the lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "first position").

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 have one side (the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed). (The short side) is turned downward, so that the decoration member 450 is positioned at the lowermost position and is stretched on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center in the horizontal direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the radially outer end side of the support member. Thus, the weight of the decorative member 450 can exert a force that displaces in the direction of gravity and a force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the central portion on the support portion 452a. As a result, by the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 of the decoration member 450 described later, it is possible to suppress the rattle of the decoration member 450 in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Furthermore, the rotation direction on the other side (short side where the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) of the displacement member 430 substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points Form a state of Therefore, the displacement member 430 can not perform rotational movement about the through hole 433. When the decoration member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement is caused by the rattle. The displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, lptp in which the decorative member 450 rattles can be suppressed.

  In addition, in front of both ends of the decorative member 450, a restriction unit 490 is disposed. Thereby, the displacement of the decoration member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. The detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulating unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the restriction unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. As shown in FIG. Fig.20 (a) is a side view of the control unit 490, FIG.20 (b) is a rear view of the control unit 490, FIG.20 (c) is in the XXc-XXc line of FIG.20 (b). FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 490.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the restriction unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape with an opening on the back side, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed at the open (open side) outer edge.

  The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from a side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b notched in a semicircular shape on the side surfaces on both sides in the left-right direction, and a back surface from an inner side surface facing the opening And bulging portion 491c.

  The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above, and a fastening hole is formed on the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470 Thus, the restriction unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The two notches 491 b are formed in a semicircular shape on the both side surfaces of the case member 491 in the vertical direction. The notch portion 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed by bulging from the lower side than the center of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20C). Further, the bulging portion 491 c has a predetermined gap with the roller 492 a of the roller member 492.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in an annular shape in axial straight section view, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the inside of the roller 492a, and a shaft portion 492b while supporting both sides of the roller 492a. And a pair of retaining rings E1 fitted on the shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a, is formed in a cylindrical shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between side surfaces in the left and right direction of the case member 491. It is set larger than the width dimension of. Further, recessed portions 492b1 recessed in the axial direction are formed at both axial end portions of the shaft portion 492b. The recess 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and the outer diameter in the axial direction is formed smaller than the inner diameter of a snap ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and formed in a substantially stepped cross section, and is formed of a small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 whose outer diameter is larger than that of the small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted inside.

  The small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion fitted inside the notch 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is formed larger than the inner diameter of the notch 491b of the case member 491 Be done.

  The large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for restricting the displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. The diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance between the side surfaces on the outside in the axial direction of the pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both axial ends of the roller 492a is greater than the distance between the opposing side surfaces on the inner side where the case member 491 opens. Is also made smaller.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-type retaining ring), and the opening portion is expanded in the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b and fitted around the recess 492b1. That is, the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the snap ring E1 is externally fitted in the recess 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, and then the small diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is fitted to one collar 492c from the other end (the side on which the snap ring E1 is externally fitted) The shaft portion 492b is inserted in the state of facing the). Next, after inserting the roller 492a from the other end into the shaft portion 492b, the shaft portion in a state in which the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 of one collar 492c faces one side (the side on which the snap ring E1 is externally fitted) Insert 492b. Thereafter, the one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, in the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the facing of the pair of retaining rings E1, the lateral displacement is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off the shaft 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a rectangular frame-like body that is vertically long in a front view, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed such that the shape of the inner periphery in the front view is substantially the same as the shape of the inner periphery of the opening in the rear view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 493, a standing portion 493a standing on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

  In the standing portion 493a, a recessed portion 493a1 which is recessed on the back side is formed. The recess 493 a 1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491 b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 and the recess portion 493a1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c disposed at both axial end portions of the roller member 492 are provided in the notches 491b of the case member 491 so as to support the collars 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 in a state where the standing portion 493a side is the front side (directed to the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 is disposed rotatably with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

  Next, the operation of the regulating unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. Fig.22 (a) is an enlarged view of the up-and-down displacement unit 400 in XXII part of FIG. 21, FIG.22 (b) is sectional drawing of the up-and-down displacement unit 400 in the XXIIb-XXIIb line of FIG.22 (a). . In FIG. 22A, the outlines of the roller 492a and the decoration member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24 (a) is a cross sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23 (b), and FIG. 24 (c) is a vertical line along line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 23 (c). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400. 23 (a) to 23 (c) show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is positioned at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decoration member 450 are positioned on the back side of the restriction unit 490.

  In this case, when the decoration member 450 is disposed at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decoration member 450 may rattle against the front base 410 according to the rotational displacement. Therefore, an engagement means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 may be provided to suppress rattling. The engagement means is an engagement member disposed on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and biased by the biasing means, and formed to be engageable with the engaging member and the decorative member 450 or the front base And an engaged member disposed on the other of 410, and using the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the engagement member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. Then, when the decorative member 450 is placed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means to engage with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engagement means, and rattling of the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engagement means, in order to bring the engagement means into engagement (place the main body member in the first position), the engagement member is pushed against the biasing force of the biasing means. Not only when it is necessary to retract but also when the engagement state of the engagement means is released (displacement member 450 is displaced from the first position toward the second position), the urging force of the urging means is resisted. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force necessary for displacing the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact surface 452 h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492 a of the restriction unit 490, the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the displacement direction when the decoration member 450 is arranged to the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 are set substantially in parallel, the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position Since the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, the driving force necessary for displacing the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastically deformable elastic body as described above, when the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490 abuts on the abutting surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. As a result, the roller 492a is made difficult to rotate, and rattling of the decorative member 450 against the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an elastic body, it is preferable that it is a viscoelastic body illustrated by rubber | gum, urethane, etc. In this case, the vibration damping function can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration isolation function that damps and insulates the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 with the displacement of the rotation unit 500. This is because wear and failure of various devices disposed on the side 410 and loosening of the fastening portion can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotation unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations from the decorative member 450. Since the front base 410 is input, adopting a visco-elastic body is particularly effective.

  In addition, when the decorative member 450 and the restriction unit 490 (the roller 492a) abut on each other, the product accuracy and the assembling error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy in molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the restriction unit 490 (roller 492a) contact can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to suppress the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest. Further, since the rotational axis direction of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a are in contact with each other. When displaced in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the noise that the members of each other rub against each other. That is, if the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to suppress the assistance of stopping the movement of the displacement member or the backlash, the members of the displacement member rub against each other when the projection is displaced in the contact state. A sound is generated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, so the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the rubbing noise between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a.

  Further, since restriction of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the restriction unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the restriction unit 490 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the decoration member 450. Since it is not necessary to reduce the weight of the decorative member 450 and suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and also to suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotation unit 500. In addition, since the weight of the decorative member 450 serving as the vibration source can be reduced, rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG.23 and FIG.24, the contact aspect of the decoration member 450 and the control unit 490 at the time of the decoration member 450 displacing from a 2nd position to a 1st position is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 or the case member 491. It is arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b), the lower end face of the decorative member 450 is a case. When the member 491 is displaced to substantially the same vertical position as the vertical middle position, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the restriction unit 490 abuts on the front surface of the decorative member 450. State. Thereby, it can suppress that the decoration member 450 rattles back and forth and right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and is in contact with the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (left and right direction in FIG. 24B) As a result, the decorative member 450 is prevented from rattling back and forth. In addition, since the roller 492a is rotatable in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and can not rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves in the left and right direction, rattling of the decorative member 450 in the left and right direction is suppressed. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is vertically displaced at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other. It can be done.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452g is used when the decorative member 450 is disposed to the first position. Thus, the roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the decoration member 450 to the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward and positioned at the first position from the states shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the restriction unit 490. And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be in contact with each other.

  Here, if the rotating member (roller 492a) that rotates the decorative member 450 displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating member (roller 492a) rotating along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating member (roller 492a) It is difficult to regulate along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 so as not to displace the decorative member 450 against rattling in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. Substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting them, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, only the vertical displacement for displacing the decorative member 450 to the first position can be permitted by the restriction unit 490, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 Forming the dead point can suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 in the vertical direction. As a result, since relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to displacement of the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The rollers 492a disposed below the rollers 492a arranged in the vertical direction are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side is in contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C) (elastically deformed) Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. As a result, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b can be increased, making it difficult to rotate the roller 492a. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to displacement of the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24C left-right direction) It is also conceivable to form a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, the diameter of the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is considered. A structure that can be displaced in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and the elastic deformation is used to make the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As a result, the structure can be simplified to improve the durability and reduce the product cost.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decoration member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 with the displacement of the rotation unit 500 is When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is utilized to form the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. The roller 492a can be held more firmly in the bulging portion 491c. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and can suppress relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, so that rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500 Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the displacement resistance can be increased as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, when stopping the decorative member 450 at the first position, the stopping operation breaks other parts. Can be suppressed.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided at the central portion of the decoration member 450, when it is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to each part in addition to the weight of the decoration member 450. Because it works, parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the operation of stopping can be assisted, so that the operation of stopping in a more fragile direction can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress breakage of parts and to improve the reliability of the product.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are vertically arranged in parallel along the displacement direction of the decoration member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decoration member 450 are abutted at two places at predetermined intervals. Accordingly, tilting of the decorative member 450 can be suppressed, and rattling of the rotation unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 on the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500.

  Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (ie, the surface on which the roller 492a is in contact). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is disposed in parallel with each of the contact surface 452 h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492 a. Thereby, the front base of the decoration member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500 is suppressed while restraining the driving force required when arranging the decoration member 450 to the first position and displacing the first position to the second position. The rattling against 410 can be effectively suppressed.

  Specifically, since the displacement form of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession movement of the rotation unit 500 (a movement in which the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings in a circle). It vibrates in the aspect (mode) which makes the rotation plane of the unit 500 incline. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452 h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, whereby the contact surface 452 h of the front base 452 (ie, the roller 492 a The surface to be abutted can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when disposing the decorative member 450 to the first position and displacing it from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force necessary for displacing the decorative member 450. However, due to the contact of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a, rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to displacement (rotation) of the rotation unit 500 can be effectively suppressed. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotation unit 500 disposed in the decoration member 450 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 is provided with gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 and a drive motor attached to the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back side of the front base 452 are mainly formed.

  The front base 452 is formed with a concave portion 452 c which is recessed on the back side at a central portion thereof. The concave portion 452c is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and has an insertion hole 452f formed penetrating in the front-rear direction in its axial portion, and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on side surfaces of both end portions in the left-right direction. Ru.

  The rear surface base 453 is formed of a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape in front view and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape smaller than the front view shape of the front surface base 452, and an opening 453b opened in the front and rear direction at a central portion It is mainly provided with the penetration hole 453a which opens, and the axial support parts 453c and 453d which project in a column shape on the front side.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of a drive motor 457 to be described later is inserted, and is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 It is opened in a circle. The opening 453 b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the front view shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

  The shaft support portions 453 c and 453 d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456 described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each of the gears 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotational angle and rotational speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back surface base 453 as described above, and the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453 a of the back surface base 453. It is fixed by fastening.

  The gear 454 is engaged with the gear 455, and is fixed to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 through which the insertion hole 453a of the rear surface base 453 is inserted. The gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the distance between the back base 453 and the front base 452. When the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are provided. It can rotate without abutting on the side of the When rotational driving force is applied from the drive motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 is engaged with the rear surface base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500 described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through the shaft support portion 453c projecting forward of the rear surface base 453 and rotates around the shaft support portion 453c. Arranged as possible. Further, the thickness of the gear 455 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the distance between the back base 453 and the front base 452, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are provided. It can rotate without abutting on the side of the When a rotational drive force is applied from the drive motor 457, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the back base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  The gear 455 is partially inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 and engaged with the back base 571 of the rotation unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is engaged with the back base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member in which a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) protrudes from the side surface (axial direction end surface), and its axial hole is externally fitted to the shaft support portion 453 d of the back surface base 453. It is disposed on the base 453. Further, a part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452 e and engaged with the rear base 571. Further, the thickness of the gear 456 is smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the back base 453 and the front base 452, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are provided. It can rotate without abutting on the side of the When the drive power for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457, and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotation unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the drive power for rotation is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth inscribed on the outer circumferential surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 inscribed on the outer circumferential surface of the back surface base 571 of the rotation unit 500 are set equal. The gear 456 can be rotated once per rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thereby, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating unit 500, and is configured such that a shaft 458a that protrudes from the front can rotate. Further, the shaft portion 458a is formed to have a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened therein, and the electric wiring is inserted through the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the back side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453 b of the back surface base 453, the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the inside of the shaft portion 458 a And the front base 452 is projected from the front.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded back perspective view of the rotation unit 500. Fig.29 (a) is a top view of rotation unit 500, FIG.29 (b) is a front view of rotation unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of Fig.29 (a), and FIG.29 (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit 500 in XXIXc-XXIXc line | wire of 29 (a). The description of the rotation unit 500 will be made in the state at the initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530, a reflecting plate 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflecting plate 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

  The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and is provided with a rear surface base 571 disposed on the rear surface side and a front surface base 572 disposed on the front surface side. , And a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The rear surface base 571 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges out in an annular shape in a rear surface view from the inner peripheral edge portion to the rear surface side is formed. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is engaged with the gear 455 as described above. Thereby, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force of rotation is transmitted to the rear surface base 571 (gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and an outer standing portion 572a standing from an outer peripheral edge portion, and an inner standing portion 572b standing in a U shape in a front view from an inner circumferential circle portion. And.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the back surface base 571 and the back surface of the front surface 572 and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposing surfaces. The height is set to be substantially the same as the axial width dimension of the BR, and the inner shape is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface of the erected front end side of the outer side erected portion 572a is in contact with the front surface of the back surface base 571 and a screw inserted from the back surface side of the back surface base 571 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wire connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. It is erected in a substantially U-shape in rear view, and its inner shape is formed substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the front view shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

  Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572b can be externally fitted to the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 engage with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it can be suppressed that the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 is twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses the transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. Are formed by fitting a spherical or cylindrical metal body between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572 a of the front base 572. Thus, the bearing BR can be fixed to the outer standing portion 572 a of the front base 572 and disposed. In this case, the inner diameter of the back surface base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the back base 571 facing each other, detachment of the bearing BR from the rotation transmission unit 570 is suppressed.

  The fastening member 573 is a member for fastening the rotation unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and includes a projecting wall portion 573a that protrudes from an outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the inner standing portion 572 b of the front base 572. Thus, the fastening member 573 is disposed on the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge thereof is internally fitted to the inner edge of the bearing BR, and the inner edge portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner edge. .

  The projecting wall portion 573a is a projecting portion for suppressing removal of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed so as to project over the entire periphery with a fixed projecting dimension from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573. The outside diameter dimension is set to be larger than the inside diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by internally fitting the fastening member 573 to the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, removal of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed.

  Specifically, the fastening member 573 can be restricted from being moved rearward relative to the bearing BR by internally fitting the fastening member 573 to the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is achieved by arranging the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 The side of the is abutted and regulated. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the fastening member 573 to which the bearing BR is externally fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotational motion when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated to rotate the ring-shaped metal body disposed inside. Non-transmission can suppress rotation of the fastening member 573. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated relative to the decoration member 450.

  The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves to the back side (the upper side in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and its front edge is curved downward (the far side in FIG. 29A). It is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 which bulges in a semicircular shape in a front view in a central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29B) And a pressing portion 513 that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is mainly formed.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion to be fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and a fastening hole to be fastened to the front base 572 is drilled on the back side. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. As a result, it is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

  The blower hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29C), and is formed in a long hole shape which is long in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29A). Further, a plurality of air vents 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 and the upper surface base 510 which are held between the opposing surfaces, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The projection height is set to the height to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed to protrude at the edge on the back side of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is disposed symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transfer unit 570. In addition, since the decoration part 521 and the ventilation hole 522 which are formed in the lower surface base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the ventilation hole 512 which are formed in the upper surface base 510, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 and viewed from the front. The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest by the player visually observing the mechanism for rotating the rotation unit 500.

  The irradiation unit 530 mainly includes the base member 531 and the LEDs 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

  The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape slightly smaller than that of the upper surface base 510 when viewed from the upper surface. Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

  Further, in the base member 531, a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the edge on the front side. The through hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the arrangement of the base member 531, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458 b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531. Thus, light can be emitted from an LED 532 described later via an IC or a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface mount type LED, and the outer shape (the outer shape of the cavity molded from resin ceramic) in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape, and the irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon sealed in the cavity) for emitting light. Etc.) is formed in a front view circular shape. Further, the LEDs 532 are disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of the LEDs 532 are disposed side by side in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 in top view. Thereby, the LED 532 can emit light to the reflection plate 560 described later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like member whose outline in top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510. As a result, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light transmitting material and is formed in an arc shape in top view. Further, the front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflector 560 has a silver-colored decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the top shape of the top base 510. In addition, the reflection plate 560 is provided with a concave portion 564 in which the side surface on the front side is notched rearward.

  The recessed portion 564 is disposed such that the front cover 550 described above is inserted into the cutout portion thereof so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is substantially at the same position as the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. It can be set up. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to be the distance dimension from the front surface of the concave portion 564 of the reflection plate 560 to the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520 and the intermediate member 540. Thereby, the front cover 550 can be suppressed from being disposed so as to protrude from the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be assembled as an integral unit with little unevenness, and when the rotation unit 500 is viewed, the external shape of each part can not be easily understood, and loss of the player's interest can be suppressed. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 30 (a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30 (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), when viewed from above, the intermediate member 540 is a first outer edge erected upward from the outer edge (in the direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) 541 and the second outer edge portion 54, the irradiation hole 543 penetratingly formed in the vertical direction, the irradiation control portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and the projection provided protruding from the front edge It is mainly provided with the part 545 and the groove part 546 recessed by the outer-periphery edge part of the irradiation control part 544.

  The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion of the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inside diameter of the curved shape in top view of the front side (the lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is substantially the same as the outside diameter of the front side curved shape in top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. It is set identically. Further, the vertical dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so as to be invisible from the front side.

  The second outer edge 542 is formed on the outer edge of the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape in top view of the back side (the upper side in FIG. 30A) of the second outer edge portion 542 is formed substantially the same as the shape of the back side in top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Also, the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set to be lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be discharged smoothly to the back.

  The irradiation holes 543 are holes for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 disposed in the irradiation unit 530, and are opened at positions facing the LEDs 532 disposed in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED 532 irradiates another range. The inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their respective axes are coaxially arranged. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  Further, the irradiation hole 543 is formed to have a large inner diameter from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) to the lower surface side. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflection portion 563 of the reflection plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 is provided to protrude around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Thereby, the gap between the facing of the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543, and leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  Further, the projecting dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the erected dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the projecting tip end surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 The LED 532 is abutted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LEDs from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be made clear. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation restricting portion 544 in contact with the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation control part 544 and the adjacent irradiation control part 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other are connected, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be enhanced. In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is formed in a circular shape, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other. In other words, the group in which the plurality of radiation control portions 544 are connected is formed in a convex-concave outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of arcs convex outward is continuous), so a space (surface area) is secured to enhance the heat dissipation effect. However, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be enhanced by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

  The projecting portion 545 is a protrusion that restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530 back and forth and right and left, and is formed at a position to be inserted into the through hole 531 a of the base member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. Further, the projecting portion 545 is formed into a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are vertically combined, and a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side smaller in diameter than the large diameter portion 545a. It is formed from

  The large diameter portion 545a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the middle member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the middle member 540, and the penetration of the base member 531 is performed. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the projecting dimension thereof is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

  Thus, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the front side intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the back side intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. Further, since the protrusion distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 in the vertical direction is the side surface of the intermediate member 540 in the vertical direction. It can be arranged parallel to each other.

  The small diameter portion 545 b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in the intermediate member 540, and substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531 a of the base member 531. It is set to the same or slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 in the intermediate member 540, the through hole 531a of the base member 531 is externally fitted in the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, whereby the irradiation unit 530 for the intermediate member 540 is in the front and rear, right and left direction. Can define the movement of

  The groove 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation control portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. The area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased due to the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, so the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove 546 extending along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544, the region recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is secured. By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded to a portion where the generated heat particularly concentrates, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove 546 is set smaller than the distance from the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation restricting portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recess depth of the groove 546 is more than half the thickness of the intermediate member 540. It is set small.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). In FIG. 31 (b), the diffusion part 551 is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the side of the inner edge side (upper side of FIG. 31 (b)) on the lower side (left side of FIG. 31 (b)). It is formed and provided.

  The diffusion portion 551 is a roughened portion, and the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 can be diffusely reflected and diffused by the rough surface. In addition, roughening processing is a processing mode which forms an unevenness | corrugation in the surface.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the reflector 560 will be described in detail. 32 (a) is a top view of the reflecting plate 560, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflecting plate 560 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a). In FIG. 32 (b), the reflection part 563 is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the reflection plate 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 standing on the upper surface side (the front side in FIG. 32A) and the partition wall 561 thereof. It is mainly provided with a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region, and a standing wall 562 standing along the edge on the back side.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape in which the front side (the lower side in FIG. 32A) is open in a top view, and a plurality of partition walls 561 in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflection plate 560 The pieces are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined into one wall portion (composed as one wall portion) extending in the front direction. Thereby, the space which put the partition wall 561 in parallel can be made small. As a result, it is possible to maximize the number of partition walls 561 formed.

  The reflective portion 563 is formed by roughing the upper surface of the region surrounded by the edge portion on the front surface side of the reflective plate 560 and the partition wall 561 in top view, by laser processing or the like. In addition, the reflecting portion 563 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a formed from the side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560 and the horizontal portion 563a, and the plate thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as it is separated from the horizontal portion 563a. An inclined surface 563b inclined in a direction is mainly provided.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on the side surface of the side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflection plate 560 except the edge portion on the front side. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (the reflective portion 563) is not formed at the edge on the front side, and the surface is not roughened. Accordingly, the edge portion on the front side of the reflection plate 560 can be held to form the reflection portion 563. As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion for roughening on the reflection plate 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563 b is a portion that mainly reflects light irradiated from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532 It is formed on the surface.

  Further, the connection position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes the axis of the illumination surface of the LED 532. Thereby, the light irradiated toward the back side among the lights irradiated from the LED 532 can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563 b. On the other hand, the light irradiated to the front side among the lights irradiated from the LED 532 can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

  The erected wall 562 is erected along the edge on the back side of the reflecting plate 560 as described above, and the erected height thereof is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thus, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflective plate 560), a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflective plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, heat can be suppressed from being stored in the reflective plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the base unit 531 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotary unit 500 can store heat as the rotary unit 500 stores heat. Damage can be suppressed.

  As described above, the rotating unit 500 configured is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted from the front side to the inner circle portion of the bearing BR, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After the front base 572, the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 are integrated, the back base 571 is disposed on the back side, and the front base 572 and the back base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  The lower portion base 520 is disposed on the lower side of the reflection plate 560 in the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 in a state in which the front cover 550 is sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state in which the through hole 531a is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening it with the intermediate member 540, the front portion (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) of the rotation unit 500 is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is disposed behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 is assembled as one unit by fastening the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described. Fig.33 (a) is a top view of rotation unit 500, FIG.33 (b) is sectional drawing of rotation unit 500 in the XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb line | wire of Fig.33 (a). (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 is a partial expanded sectional view of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV part of FIG. 33 (b).

  In FIG. 33 (a), a state in which the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500 is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 34 (a) and FIG.34 (b), the light irradiated from LED532 is illustrated by the dashed-two dotted line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, the reflecting portion 563 partitioned as a region of 1 is disposed by being surrounded by the partition wall 561. . As described above, since the LEDs 532 are disposed above the irradiation holes 543, the light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be emitted to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being divided by each reflecting portion 563, the division of the light of each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflection portion 563, and the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, since a structure for causing the light of the LED 532 to be incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is made of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light irradiated from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflection plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and is below the front side (FIG. 34A) Side), and transmits through the front cover 550 and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, even when the attitude of the base member 531 makes the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the LED 532 and perform afterimage display by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Further, the light irradiated from the LED 532 can be efficiently emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563 b of the reflection plate 560. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the light intensity of afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563 b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563 b and reflected to the opposing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is again reflected by the surface (the opposing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560), and is thereby irradiated to the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed in white which has a lower light absorption rate than black, light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflector 560 has a silver-colored decoration on its outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflector 560 again.

  Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be irregularly reflected by the rough surface, and can be emitted from the front side (to the player) of the rotation unit 500 in a state of being uniformly dispersed. That is, light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 can be prevented from being viewed in a state of being biased to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light irradiated from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal part 563a of the reflection plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal part 563a, and is below the front side (FIG. 34 (b)). Side). Therefore, light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front side through the front cover 550.

  Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed at the front end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player's side) of the rotation unit 500. The light intensity of afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the end on the front side of the rotating unit 500 among the inner surfaces of the reflecting plate 560 is roughened, light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the player side Because the light emitted toward the surface is reduced, the front end of the reflection plate 560 is not formed, and is at least a smooth surface that is flatter than the rough surface processed into the reflection portion 563. Can be increased to increase the light toward the front side (player side) of the rotation unit 500.

  Further, in the end portion of the partition wall 561 on the front side relative to the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where roughening of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)), the front side (concave portion 564 is formed As it is tapered toward the end of the side), the roughened non-formed portion of the horizontal portion 563a has a cross-sectional area of its inner surface as it goes to the front end of the rotary unit 500. It is enlarged (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

  Furthermore, the front side of the reflection plate 560 (rotation unit 500) is formed to be curved toward the back side toward the end centering on the central portion (rotational axis) in the left-right direction. As the end of the side on which the notch 564 is formed is separated from the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 in the radial direction, the front side (concave notch 564 is formed in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561) The length dimension of the end of the side is increased. Thereby, the perceived brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotation unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher toward the radial direction outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light at the same brightness, the rotation axis The closer to the light of the LED 532, the higher the brightness (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 farther from the rotation axis (radially outward).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the front end of the reflection plate 560 is separated from the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 in the radial direction, the front side in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 Since the length dimension of the end portion on the side where the portion 564 is formed is increased, the irregular reflection by the rough surface is made stronger as the reflection portion 563 (LED 532) spaced apart radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 Thus, the light can be viewed as light of high brightness (ie, by reducing the proportion of light viewed directly from the LED 532 to the player). As a result, it is possible to make the lightness (brightness of light) uniform by suppressing the difference in the brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction.

  Further, the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563 a of the reflection plate 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotation unit 500 is increased as it is separated in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. It is possible to make the perceived lightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  The light irradiated to the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

  In addition, here, if the light of the LED 532 is to be viewed by the player directly (without passing through the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has high directivity to the front, so the player is dazzling I was afraid to feel it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surfaces to diffusely reflect the light emitted from the LED 532 are formed at two points of the reflecting plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player visually recognizes the light emitted and feels dazzling.

  Here, there is known a device which has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position to perform display by the afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the attitude of the base (base member 531) makes the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side) Since the posture is parallel to the rotation plane), the outer shape in front view (rotational axis direction view) is enlarged. Therefore, there is a problem that in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (rotation unit 500) is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the rotation unit 500 is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the rotation unit 500, the base member 531 in which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in a row has the top surface base in a posture in which the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted Since it arrange | positions between 510 and the lower surface base 520, the external shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in a plain view (view in the rotation axis direction) can be suppressed. As a result, when the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 can be improved.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

  35 (a) and 35 (b) are front views of the rotation unit 500. FIG. 36 (a) and 36 (b) are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  In FIGS. 35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotation unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the sign of the air flow K is given. In addition, the air holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, only when the rotation unit 500 is rotated left in a front view, only the flow of the air flow K is reversed around the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 when it is rotated right in a front view. Since there is, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 457 described above, external air intrudes from the ventilation holes 512, 522 by the rotation. An air flow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the air vents 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotational direction of the rotating unit 500, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air vents 512 and 522 are opened via the air vents 512 and 522. External air can be easily introduced into the rotation unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated in the left direction in the front view, the air blowing holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right in the front view and the air holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left in the front view The reference numeral 522 is displaced in a direction for taking in (inserts) air into the air holes 512, 522. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotation unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  In addition, since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates rightward in a front view, rotation at the initial position The external air can be easily taken into the inside of the rotation unit 500 by the air vents 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side in front view of the unit 500 and the air vents 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side in front view. That is, even when the rotation unit 500 is rotated in the right direction, the same operation and effect as those described above (when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the left in front view) can be obtained.

  Here, the base (base member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is disposed inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the LED is emitted while rotating the rotating body. If the heat generated during operation of the IC or the capacitor can not be sufficiently cooled, the LED soldered to the substrate or the solder for controlling the IC or capacitor may melt and cause contact failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the air vents 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the outside air is taken into the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Thus, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the inside of the rotation unit 500 from the air holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The air flow K dispersed on the back side (the back side of the drawing of FIG. 35A) of the rotation unit 500 is directed to the outside of the rotation unit 500 from the opening on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 It is blown and released to the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, the air flow K dispersed on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 35A) of the rotation unit 500 is radial direction from the rotation axis by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotation unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, is blown to the outside of the rotation unit 500, and is released to the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, since the combined shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is formed in a container-like shape in which the back surface side is opened, the rotation unit 500 is efficient in the external air taken in from the blower holes 512 and 522 from the back surface side. Can be evacuated so that the heat can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress that such exhaust air affects the balls flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are rectangular in a front view (that is, viewed in the rotational axis direction) which is elongated along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As it is formed, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is made to the longitudinal end side (radially outward in rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It can be made to flow and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transfer unit 570.

  That is, since the rotational speed is low in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the air flow holes 512 and 522 in the side walls is low (or not taken), air circulation using the centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570 The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken outside air is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force and the flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LEDs 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transfer unit 570 can be achieved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the air inside the rotation unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotation unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotation unit 500 is reduced. External air is taken in from the gap on the back side of the 500 rotation transfer units 570 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transfer unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is below (FIG. 29A paper surface back side) (the front edge of the lower surface base is above) (A curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is a rectangular shape) Since the angle of the portion of the air which is flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) by the centrifugal force is turned at right angles toward the back side, vortices are easily formed at this portion . Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the rear side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29A back of the sheet) (the front edge of the lower surface 520 is upward) (Curved part) is formed to be curved outward from the center in the left-right direction, so the air flowed to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) is gradually The air can be flowed to the back side, and the angle of the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward) can be made larger than the substantially right angle because the angle of the air diverted to the back side can be larger Air flow can be smoothed by suppressing the formation of vortices. Therefore, exhaust from the rear side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transfer unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  Furthermore, regarding the distance dimension between the facing on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A), the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 is on the longitudinal end side Since the distance dimension on the back side is made larger, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward in rotation) using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation. When the outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the outside air can be efficiently taken in by discharging the air from the back side in the radially outer side.

  In addition, since the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 (inner circumference of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circle concentric with the rotation axis. With the rotation of the lower surface base 520, the external air on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be prevented from being disturbed (flow in the rotational direction is formed). As a result, external air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer side erected portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed so as to narrow from the back side toward the front side, the rotating unit 500 is the decorative portion of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520 It is possible to suppress the generation of vortices in the air flow K when taking in air from the gap between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the air flow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be made smooth, and when the outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the take-in can be performed efficiently. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a center cover 620 provided in such a manner as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame 610. And a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610.

  The frame 610 has a stage 611 projecting to the center cover 620 side (the back side) from the lower part of the edge of the inner periphery in front view, a wall 612 projecting radially outward from the side of the outer periphery, and the back side Mainly formed with a fastening hole 613 recessed in a circular shape toward the front side at the edge of the frame and an opening 614 opened in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 disposed on the back side Ru.

  Further, the frame 610 is a member disposed at the central portion of the game board 13 in a manner surrounding the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and visible through the glass 8 to the player. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is bent from the lower inner edge of the frame 610 to the back side, and the first concave portion 611a is formed on the upper surface at the front end, and the second concave is formed on the rear end The installation parts 611 b are respectively recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the ball on its upper surface, and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611 a or the second recessed portion 612 b to It is possible to form a state in which the ball is easy to win in the winning opening 64. Therefore, since it is possible to form a plurality of flow paths of the balls flowing down the game area, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping the ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side (front side of the base plate 60) of the gaming board 13, and the depth of the recess toward the front side Is formed deep. The second recessed portion 611 b is a groove for sending a ball to the opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is larger than the inner shape of the opening formed in the direction. Thus, when the center frame 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening of the base plate 60, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 abuts the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60. The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are holes which are formed in a plurality and recessed on the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing the through holes 623a of the center cover 620 described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later to the front side, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 to which the sensor light of the sensor 630 is irradiated.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light transmitting material, formed in a substantially circular shape in a front view, a cover member 621 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame 610, and the left and right edges of the cover member 621 Mainly formed of a side wall portion 622 erected on the front side from the side, and an attaching portion 623 projecting outward from the erected leading end surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower side edge portion of the cover member 621 Ru.

  The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness (having a convex curved surface on the front side) that curves to the back side as it goes outward from the center upper portion in the left-right direction in front view. A peripheral edge on the upper side (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion 621a") of the central portion in the left-right direction is formed forward of the peripheral edge (hereinafter, referred to as "second portion") of both left and right ends and the lower end.

  Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like member having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 can suppress the action as a convex lens, and can ensure the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side in front view. Spaces can be formed between. As a result, it is possible to secure a space in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced and rendered.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion for enabling attachment of the center cover 620 to the frame 610, and as described above, the cover member 621 is curved to the back side, and accordingly, the back surface of the frame 610 and the center cover Since the distance between the facing of the front face of the frame 620 is increased, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the facing of the back face of the frame 610 and the front face of the center cover 620.

  That is, the standing dimension of the side wall portion 622 on the front side is set to the distance dimension between the back of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is disposed on the frame 610. Thus, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to suppress the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being excessively protruded to the front side of the frame 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a projecting portion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a formed in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, a fastening hole 613 is bored in the back of the frame 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like not shown is inserted into the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613 Thus, the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the action of the player, and includes a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared light, and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from the light emitted from the light emitting unit. And an irradiation surface 631 having

  The sensor 630 is disposed at a height of about 2⁄3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is vertically divided into three equal parts, and is disposed on the right side of the frame 610. Further, the sensor 630 is disposed in a state where the irradiation surface 631 is inclined to the center front side of the center frame 600. Thus, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the front central portion of the game board 13 to the player through the glass 8.

  Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  39 (a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39 (a), and FIG. 40 (b) is a cross section taken along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39 (a). FIG.

  In FIGS. 39A and 40B, the irradiation area of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated to the front of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line and illustrated as the irradiation areas R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39 (b), the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. Furthermore, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the light emitted from the sensor 630 and the sensor 630 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and disposed in front of the center frame 600 (forward of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be cut is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the game machine through the cover member 621 (penetrated), and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. Can be suppressed. Further, in the sensor 630, the decorative portion of the frame 610 is disposed on the front side. As a result, the sensor 630 can be made less visible from the player side (front side).

  The light irradiated from the sensor 630 is irradiated directly on the glass 8 from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and is irradiated on the area of the irradiation area R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 The light is reflected and emitted from the front side of the glass 8 to the area of the irradiation area R2 that is emitted.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the motion sensor (sensor 630) is disposed in the gaming machine and the action of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81) is detected, the motion sensor is exposed. And, there was a problem of losing interest.

  To that end, the sensor 630 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member (frame 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (the opening 614 of the frame 610) to the back side (outside) of the decorative member, it can be more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiated surface 631) It becomes difficult to turn to the head and the detection range is narrowed. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge of the decorative member (the opening of the frame 610), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be easily directed to the front. It becomes easy to be recognized. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 less visible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is irradiated to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, whereby the curved shape of the cover member 621 It is reflected to the player side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame 610 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize, and to secure a range in which an object can be detected. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmitting material, the visibility of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the front of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position near the sensor 630 The angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630 while the angle of reflection can be made more acute.

  Furthermore, when the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (the light reflected by the cover member 621) is irradiated to the object and reflected, it is reflected to the cover member 621 side. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object, but the traveling of the light reflected in different directions is reflected by reflecting the light reflected in a plurality of directions on the front of the cover member 621 The direction can be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light receiving detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is positioned on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is positioned on the rear side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610 (see FIG. b) see). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). It is disposed at a position closer to the rear side than the rear side.

  Thereby, the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 in the upper part of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Also, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased within the limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or on the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 ( Interference of the rotation unit 500) with the first portion 621a can be more reliably suppressed, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly.

  Furthermore, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position closer to the back than the back of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover 621 can be increased, and the front of the cover 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. It can be easy. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while disposing the sensor 630 on the back side to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is positioned above the cover member 621, in the store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (the player side) Can be suppressed.

  That is, if the upper part of the cover member 621 is curved to the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from diagonally above is shaped to be easily reflected to the front side, the front of the cover member 621 is Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface directed downward at least from the horizontal direction, light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another game machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress that such light is reflected toward the player, As a result, it can be suppressed that the player feels dazzling and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is deteriorated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. In FIG. 41 (a), the initial position (reference position) (position where the extending direction is directed horizontally) of the rotation unit 500 is illustrated, and in FIG. 41 (b), the rotation unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. The embodiment rotated 90 degrees is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600. At the time of positioning, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotation unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thus, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is an accessory that rotates in front of the third symbol display device 81, a flow of wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and a ball flowing down under the influence of the wind is There was a problem that it would move.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the balls roll, the balls rolling on the top of the stage 611 are susceptible to the wind caused by the rotation of the rotation unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621 b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed on the lower side of the stage 611 of the frame 610 (ie, Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame 610), it is possible to separate the falling area of the ball from the displacement area of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621 b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball by the action of the wind. In addition, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 and dust or dust is blown away by the wind, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) can block the dust, so the blown dust or dust is a sensor. It is possible to suppress the decrease in detection accuracy due to soaring on the light emission / reception route.

  Here, it has been conventionally known that a stage wall of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 wraps around to the front side from the front end of the back side erected from the stage 611, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13 , And affect the balls rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the ball of the stage (that is, a closed passage is formed) so that the ball rolling on the stage 611 is not influenced by the wind. And the ball rolling on the top of the stage 611 is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so the player's interest is lost.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the wind generated when the rotation unit 500 is rotated is the second portion 621b (cover member 621) Can be blocked by As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball by the action of the wind while making the ball rolling on the top of the stage 611 more visible to the player.

  Here, when the displacement area in which the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down area in which the ball flows down are divided by the partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface disposed on the back side of the game board 13 Since a large number of heat generating members such as the third symbol display device 81 and the drive motor 441 for driving the vertical displacement unit 400 are arranged in the case 300, the heat is generated in the displacement area (the back side of the game board 13 ), There is a problem that the substrate for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Therefore, heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 can be suppressed from remaining on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, since the cool air on the front side (more than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is formed at the upper portion of the center frame 600, the heated air is passed through the predetermined distance on the front side of the game board 13 It is easy to That is, since the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by its heat, from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a formed at the upper side and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610, it is on the front side It can be made easy to flow. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat buildup on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and a wind is generated, the wind flows out from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down the front of the game board 13 May affect the ball.

  On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be directed toward the upper area (the area above the opening of the game board 13) of the game area, and the action of the wind causes the ball Can be controlled to be affected by That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a and flowed into the game area, and the speed is relatively fast. It is less susceptible to wind compared to a ball rolling on 611. In other words, the wind can be directed to the area where the sphere is less susceptible to the influence of the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotation member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Next, the distribution apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of distribution device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of distribution device 700. As shown in FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 45 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 taken along line XLVa-XLVa of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along line XLVd-XLVd of FIG.

  In FIG. 43, the outer circumferential surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. In FIG. 45 (d), the path of the ball paid out from the opening 744 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting apparatus 700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the gaming board 13 and is disposed frontward relative to the base plate 60 (the front side of the plane of FIG. 43). It is mainly provided with a side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 disposed on the back side (the back side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60.

  The front side forming portion 710 mainly includes a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The back surface forming portion 720 is mainly provided with an intervening member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and has the above-described first winning opening 64 located at the center upper portion in the left-right direction, and a first motorized prize 640a located below the first winning opening 64. And a through hole 731 located on both sides in the left-right direction of the first motorized accessory 640a and formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through-hole 731 and formed in the front-rear direction , Is mainly provided.

  The through hole 731 is a member through which the upper side projecting portion 741 of the bending member 740 to be described later is inserted, and the through hole 731 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper side projecting portion 741 in rear view. . Further, on the lower surface of the through hole 731, a projecting wall 731 a is formed to project upward from the back to the front.

  The two projecting walls 731a are arranged symmetrically with respect to the centerline of the through hole 731 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller as going from the rear side to the front side. Therefore, the ball passed (rolled) through the inside of the through hole 731 by the interposing member 750 and the distributing member 760 which will be described later is guided to the center position of the two projecting walls 731 a in the left and right direction. It rolls to the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape in a front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and protrudes upward from the lower surface at a central position in the left-right direction in the front view. And a second protrusion 732 b.

  The first projection 732 a is formed to have a larger projection distance as it goes from the front side (right side in FIG. 45A) to the back side (left side in FIG. 45A). The second protrusion 732 b is formed such that the protrusion distance becomes smaller as it goes from the front side to the back side. In addition, the distance between the first and second protrusions 732a and 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the back side by the inclination from the front side to the back side of the second protrusion 732 b. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first protrusion 732 a.

  A sensor SE that detects passage of a ball is disposed on the back of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member which is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the side surface, and the ball passes the inside of the through hole. It is possible to detect the passage of The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. As a result, the opening direction of the through hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that the sphere passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE can be prevented from remaining inside the through hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is substantially at the center of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in front view Are arranged symmetrically, and their outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  Further, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap of a size allowing a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the playing area in front view. As a result, the balls flowing down the lower playing area of the bending member 740 are prevented from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and staying in the playing area.

  The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper projecting portion 741 projecting from the back surface, a lower projecting portion 743 projecting from below the upper projecting portion 741, and an upper projecting portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower projections 743 facing each other.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape whose lower side opens in a rear view, and the outer shape thereof is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 and disposed. Therefore, when arranging the bending member 740 to the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  Further, since the upper protrusion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in rear view, when passing the ball through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolling it to the bending member 740 side, The connection portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the roller rolls. Therefore, since rolling of a ball can be made constant, it can control that a ball stops inside penetration hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion of the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball bounces at the step, By eliminating the connection portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  Also, in this case, the upper projecting portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in a rear view, and even if the ball passes through the inside of the annular ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the balls roll. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the manufacturing cost increases because the shape of the bending member 740 becomes complicated because the upper projecting portion 741 is formed in an annular shape. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper side protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped in a rear view, the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and is formed in a substantially U-shape in a rear view in which the upper side is opened. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

  The lower projecting portion 743 is a path for throwing a ball, which is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740, to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, “second feeding path KR2”) , And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back side is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Further, the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730 in a state in which the protruding end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball feeding path (hereinafter referred to as a ball sending ball in the vertical direction between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730) A “first ball sending route KR1” is formed.

  In the bending member 740, a guide portion 742 is formed to extend from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743. The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U-shape in which the back side is opened in a side view.

  The guiding portion 742 is a projecting wall that throws the ball, which is fed from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball sending path KR1) in the vertical direction, into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 The vertical height of the lower inner edge portion is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge portion of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

  Two guide portions 742 are formed symmetrically in the left-right direction center line in a front view of the through hole 731 disposed on the back side. As a result, since the two guide portions 742 are in contact and guided (turned back to the back side), it is possible to suppress the ball from being displaced in the lateral direction.

  In addition, the mutually protruding front end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged in parallel are formed to be inclined toward the base side as they approach mutually opposing surfaces (see FIG. 45B). Thereby, it can suppress effectively that the ball | bowl which contact | abuts with the two guide parts 742 and is guided (it bends | folds to the back side) position-shifts in the left-right direction.

  Side walls 741a are formed in the upper side projecting portion 741 so as to protrude to the inside of the left and right side surfaces in the rear view. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) side walls 741a are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball fed on the inner side of the upper protrusion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in the normal state, the ball can be brought into contact with the tip end surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the ball. On the other hand, when two balls flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the ball flowing backward collides with the ball flowing ahead, the front ball enters between the side walls 741 a, A distance for escaping in the direction can be secured, and clogging of the ball inside the upper protrusion 741 can be suppressed. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball to which the inner side of the upper protrusion 741 is thrown.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape whose rear side is open in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to the vertical height substantially the same as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is approximately the middle position of the lower insertion hole 732 of the lower inserting hole 732 of the winning member 730. It is set to the height of Thereby, when a ball is continuously thrown into the inside of the bending member 740, it is possible to suppress that the previous ball escapes to the opening 744 and the ball is clogged in the inside of the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connection portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and in a laterally-long rectangular shape, and is formed in a box-like body whose front side is opened. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in front view, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the outer side in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both end portions in the left-right direction of the distribution member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the above-described winning member 730.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the left and right in front view, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper portion of the seesaw member 762 And a ball-casting opening 763 formed on the main body.

  The throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning opening 64 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the distributing member 760 is disposed on the interposed member 750 described later, the space A can be formed between the facing of the ball sending port 763 and the interposed member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the ball (i.e., a bending distance through which the ball can pass), and the first winning opening of the winning member 730 through the through hole drilled in the base plate 60. It is connected with 64 internal spaces (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball won in the first winning opening 64 can be sent to the inside of the space A, and the inside of the space A can be sent.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762 a projecting outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and an axis inserted inside the annular shape. And a portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762 b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 about an axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted inside the annular ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is interposed between the interposing member 750 and the distribution member 760, whereby the seesaw member 762 is rotatably disposed about the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for distributing the ball alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the above-mentioned space A, and the direction and the left and right of the tip of the projection 762a at the central portion A ball is thrown on the opposite side of the direction. That is, it is possible to send the ball sent from the space A in the left-right direction by the projection 762a at the central part. The projections 762 a provided at both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and also displace the direction in which the tip of the projection 762 a at the central portion is located by the weight applied when the ball passes (seesaw member 762 The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762 a and the inclined surface 761. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the central portion, the projection 762a not in contact with the inclined surface 761 is pushed downward by the guided ball colliding with the projection 762a. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward abuts on the inclined surface 761 to restrict its displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as “third ball sending path KR3”) where balls distributed to the left and right by the above-described seesaw member 762 roll and throw the ball. It is formed to be inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. Thereby, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 roll on the inclined surface 761 and send (roll) the ball to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed to be inclined in the direction approaching the interposing member 750 so that the rear side increases in thickness toward the end. Thus, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent to the end can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 disposed in front of the distribution member 760.

  The interposing member 750 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontal shape, and the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower portion in the left and right direction in the front view, the communication hole 751 penetrated in the front and rear direction in both left and right sides It is mainly provided with the recovery hole 752 opened to the lower side of the hole 751.

  The communication holes 751 are formed on the front sides of the left and right end portions of the distributing member 760 and on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at the left and right ends of the distributing member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distributing member 760 described above passes the communication hole 751 and sends the ball to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, “fourth ball sending route KR4” Can be formed.

  The recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the recovery hole 752. The collection holes 752 are connected to a device for circulating the balls installed in the store, and the balls collected in the collection holes 752 are circulated by the circulation device and re-launched from the ball firing unit 112a as gaming balls .

  The sorting apparatus 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is thrown to the distributing member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760. When the ball to which the third ball sending path KR3 is sent is sent to the end of the third ball sending path KR3, the ball is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the intervention member 750 disposed on the front side. It is thrown. The ball that is thrown from the fourth ball passing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball passing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball that is thrown from the first ball passing path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball passing path KR2. After passing through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball to be thrown in the second throwing path KR2 is thrown to the recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through holes 731 and the lower insertion holes 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the first motorized accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair. The first motorized accessory 640 a is positioned between the lower protrusions 743 of the bending member 740.

  In this case, when the angle of the downward slope of the third ball sending path KR3 is small (the slope is gentle), the flow-down speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogs are easily generated in the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball sending path KR3 is increased (the downward inclination is made steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased to make it difficult to generate ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 The space in the height direction (vertical direction) necessary for the disposition of the third ball sending path KR3 (distribution member 760) is increased, and the disposition of the first motorized accessory 640a becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is possible to prevent occurrence of ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743, and accordingly, the third ball sending route KR3 Angle of descent inclination can be made small (the descent inclination can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the disposition of the third ball sending path KR3 (distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the disposition of the first motorized accessory 640a can be enabled. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first motorized part 640a is impossible in the conventional product, and as described above, it becomes possible only by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743. It is

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed at the center of the game board 13 (a center frame 600 is disposed), and the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, the opening at the center of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) also increases with the demand for the increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third ball sending path KR3 and the first motorized product 640a are disposed in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area It was difficult.

  That is, as described above, when the falling inclination angle of the third ball sending path KR3 is reduced (the descending inclination is made gentle), the flow-down speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging is easily generated in the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball sending path KR3 is increased (the downward inclination is made steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased to make it difficult for the lower projection 743 to clog the ball. The space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the third throwing path KR3 is large, and the arrangement of the first motorized accessory 640a becomes difficult. In addition, the lower projection 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (the inner rail 61), because the lower projection 743 (the bending member 740) is disposed lower (lower) in the vertical direction. It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (the bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, the occurrence of the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 can be made difficult, so 3 The angle of the downward slope of the ball feeding path KR3 can be reduced (the downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the arrangement position in the height direction (vertical direction) of the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) can be raised (increased), so the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) and the game area A gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the lower edge of the lower rail (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is unnecessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (the bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first motorized accessory 640a, an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is This arrangement is impossible in the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 46 (a) corresponds to FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 46 (b) corresponds to FIG. 45 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in an almost gapless manner (that is, two balls are connected in series), the previous (preceding) A part of the ball is thrown to the back side while entering the opening 744 and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the ball is formed, and if the passage is to be bent, two balls in such a passage have almost no gap (two balls are connected When the ball is thrown, the ball following the leading ball is caught, and the ball following the leading ball presses against the side wall, so that both can not roll, and there is a problem that the ball clogs. The

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connection portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2, when passing through the lower projection 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 are in tolerance, it is possible to make the ball less likely to be clogged at a bent portion where the ball tends to clog. That is, in the region where the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 intersect, the ball which has flowed down (falled) the first ball sending path KR1 changes its direction and rolls toward the extension direction of the second ball sending path KR2. It is a position where movement starts, and it is easy for the following ball to catch up with the following ball. Therefore, when the ball following the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both can not roll and ball clogging is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed at the position where the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 intersect, even if the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it leads The ball can be released between the opposite sides of the opening 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) so that it is difficult to press against the side wall, and rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height substantially at the middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, the first ball sending path KR1 is dropped (flowing down) When the moving ball reaches the bottom wall of the second ball sending path KR2 (lower protrusion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be released between the facings of the openings 744 so that it is difficult to press against the side wall, and rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The lower protrusion 743 is substantially U-shaped in a side view, and the lower end of the opening 744 is spaced from the bottom wall of the lower protrusion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second ball sending path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even if an opening is formed to a size that allows passage of the ball, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the case where the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball can not pass through, normally, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall by using the opening 744. A configuration may be formed in which a row of balls presses the leading ball to the center of the opening 744, and the leading ball may be fitted into the opening 744. In this case, the rolling of the following ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening 744, and the ball clogs.

  On the other hand, since the opening 744 is larger than the outer shape of the sphere (is formed to a size that allows passage of the sphere), the following sphere is formed to press the leading ball to the center of the opening 744. Even in the case where the ball is inserted, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is fitted into the opening 744. You can avoid that. As a result, the rolling of the ball following can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), thereby flowing down the game area. Can be flowed into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member from the opening 744 The ball flowing into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (the area where the first ball sending route KR1 and the second ball sending route KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 and thus flows into the bending member 740 from the hole 744. Can be made visible to the player. Therefore, from this point as well, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 are in tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion inclined downward while being curved toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed. Thereby, when the ball flowing down (falling) the first ball sending route KR1 changes direction and starts rolling toward the extension direction of the second ball sending route KR2, the ball is inclined downward of the guide portion 742 Can be used to roll quickly. This makes it easier to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the leading ball follows the trailing ball (the ball runs along the extending direction of the second ball sending path KR2). Since it can suppress pressing on the side wall of the back side at the time of rolling, both rolling can be made easy to continue. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed on the front side (the game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs in the bent portion of the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2. In this case, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging can be improved.

  Furthermore, when dust, dirt, etc. are accumulated in the bent portion of the first ball sending route KR1 and the second ball sending route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, the cleaning property at the time of cleaning 1st ball sending course KR1 and 2nd ball sending course KR2 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the light emission decoration unit 800 will be described. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emission decoration unit 800. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light emission decoration unit 800 includes a base body 810 having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long rectangular shape disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and the front side of the base body 810. A light emitting device 820 to be disposed and a cover member 830 which is disposed on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmitting material are mainly included.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, a restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment. FIG. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of a restriction unit 2490.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. Ru.

  The restriction unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed at an outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and a case between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 It is mainly provided with a rotating member 2494 which is nipped and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 supported by the rotating member 2494.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and the width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49B) is formed larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a protruding from a side surface on the front side, and a cutout portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by cutting in a semicircular shape substantially at the center position of the vertical direction (FIG. 49 (b) vertical direction) of the side surface on both sides of the case member 2491 (horizontal direction in FIG. 49 (b)). Ru. The notch portion 2491 b is a notch for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494 b of a rotating member 2494 described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape in a front view, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 is formed to have an inner shape substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 2493, a standing portion 2493a standing on the front side around the inner edge portion is formed.

  In the standing portion 2493a, a recessed portion 2493a1 which is recessed on the back side is formed. The recessed portion 2493 a 1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491 b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotary member 2494 can be rotatably disposed on the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotary member 2494 described later between the notches 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1.

  The rotation member 2494 is formed of a plate-shaped body having an oval shape in a side view, and the longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494 b protruding in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the central portion in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494 a formed penetrating on both sides across the shaft portion 2494 b, And a restricting portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the protruding tip end of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494 b is provided to project longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494 c which bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip end portion. Thus, the rotation member 2494 can be rotated relative to the case member 2491 by internally fitting the shaft portion 2494 b into the notch portion 2491 b of the case member 2491 and arranging the recessed portion 2493 a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back side. The rotation portion 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the restriction portion 2494c.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted, and is opened in a circular shape, and the inner diameter dimension thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. As a result, after the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed is inserted through the shaft support hole 2494a, the roller member 492 can be rotated by externally fitting the retaining ring E1 to the shaft portion 492b. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft portion 492 b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494 a of the rotating member 2494 disposed in a pair, and the roller member 492 is axially supported by the rotating member 2494. Thus, it is possible to arrange two roller members 492 vertically in parallel, between the opposing rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed on the shaft portion 2494 b of the rotating member 2494 and is fitted inside the notch portion 2491 b of the case member 2491, and then the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back side to rotate The member 2494 can be disposed rotatably with respect to the case member 2491 around the shaft 2494 b. Thus, the rotational position of the rotation member 2494 can displace the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotation member 2494. In addition, a state where the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side of the roller members 492 disposed side by side is biased to the front side (left side in FIG. 49C) by the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b. It can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact aspect between the decoration member 450 and the restriction unit 2490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. (A) to (c) of FIG. 50 are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 2490, the rotary member 2494 is rotated by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotary member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side of the roller member 492 disposed on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

  Thereby, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50B is substantially the same as the vertical middle position of the case member 2491. The roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side abuts on the decorative member 450 and is pressed against the decorative member 450 when it is displaced to the position in the vertical direction of the pressure than the restriction unit 2490 of the first embodiment. It can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a protrusion (not shown) formed on the inner side of the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (of the rotating member 2494). The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

  Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B and is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, the decorative member 450 is given a driving force. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor 441.

  When the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, the roller 492a disposed on the lower side is in contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. This makes it possible to increase the pressing force of the roller 492a disposed on the upper side with respect to the decorative member 450. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 disposed above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced to make it easy to be displaced. That is, in accordance with the displacement of the decorative member 450, the pressing force exerted on the decorative member 450 from the regulating unit 2490 can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, a distribution apparatus 700 in the third embodiment will be described. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution apparatus 3700 in the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the distribution device 3700. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b) .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the distribution apparatus 3700 according to the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning opening 640 is connected to the distribution apparatus 3700.

  The sorting apparatus 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side forming portion 3710 disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710, which is mainly formed.

  The front side formation portion 3710 is mainly provided with a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The back surface side forming portion 3720 is an interposition member located below the distribution member 760, the interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, the distribution member 760 disposed on the back surface side of the interposition member 3750, and It is mainly provided with the 2nd ballistic passage 3770 arrange | positioned by the back side of 3750, and is formed.

  The winning member 3730 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and also has the first winning opening 64 described above at the upper center in the left-right direction, a first motorized item 640a below the first winning opening 64, and a first electric motor. A through hole 731 is formed penetrating in the front and rear direction on both sides in the left and right direction of the accessory 640 a, a second through hole 3733 formed penetrating in the front and rear direction below the through hole 731, and below the second through hole 3733 It is mainly provided with the lower side penetration hole 732 penetratingly formed in the front-back direction.

  The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which the ball passes inside, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view opening slightly larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Further, the second through hole 3733 is formed to be located lower than the second winning opening 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface, which protrudes from the rear side to the front side and protrudes upward. .

  The two second projecting walls 3733a are provided side by side symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction center line of the second through hole 3733 in front view, and the protruding distance is set to be smaller as going from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the interposing member 3750 and the second ball sending passage which will be described later, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left and right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , Can be rolled from the rear side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 described above, and is on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 640 described above. It arrange | positions and a pair of external shape is formed left-right symmetrically.

  The bending member 3740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper projecting portion 741 projecting from the back side, an intermediate projecting portion 3745 projecting from below the upper projecting portion 741, and an intermediate projecting portion And a lower projecting portion 743 protruding from a lower side than 3745.

  The middle projecting portion 3745 is a wall which is formed long in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53B) in rear view, and is formed on the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. The second through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the middle protrusion 3745 is located below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  In addition, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the middle protrusion 3745 and the upper protrusion 741 facing each other. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the middle protrusion 3745 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other.

  The second opening 3746 is opened in a substantially U shape that is open on the back side in a side view, and the inner shape thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size through which a ball can pass. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second ball sending passage 3770 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, is open in the front side, and is formed in a substantially box shape having a predetermined thickness. The second ball sending passage 3770 is a ball sending passage for sending a ball entering the inside of the second winning opening 640 to the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the intervening member 3750 A ball feeding passage may be formed between the inner side of the second ball sending passage 3770 and the interposing member 3750 to feed a ball.

  Further, the second ball sending path 3770 is disposed with the left end located on the back side of the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730 in front view, and the right end is the second through hole of the winning member 3730 It is disposed on the back side of the 3733. That is, the second ball sending passage 3770 is disposed on the interposed member 3750 in such a manner that the left end in a front view is positioned higher than the right end and is inclined downward toward the right end.

  Furthermore, the second ball sending path 3770 has a left end in front view connected to the second winning opening 640 and a right end connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposing member 3750. As a result, the ball entering the inside of the second winning opening 640 is thrown from the inside of the second ball sending path 3770 from the left end to the right end after being thrown into the second ball sending path 3770. The ball is thrown into the second connection hole 3753 of the mounting member 3750.

  The interposing member 3750 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and is the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower portion in the left-right direction, and a communicating hole 751 located on both left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 And a second connection hole 3753 located between the communication hole 751 on the right side and the recovery hole 752 located on the lower side of the communication hole 751 and penetrating through the second connection hole 3753. And are formed.

  The second connection hole 3753 is penetratingly formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and the inner shape thereof is set larger than the outer shape of the ball and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730 . As a result, the balls rolled on the inside of the second ball sending passage 3770 described above pass through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and are sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposing member 750.

  The distribution device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The balls entering from the first winning opening 64 are sent to the distributing member 760 and are alternately sent to the inclined surface 761 in the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is fed up to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 3750 disposed on the front side to the back side of the bending member 740. It is thrown. The ball fed to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 is guided along the projecting end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740 and falls downward, and the ball of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 After passing through the inside and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is sent to the recovery hole 752 of the insertion member 3750.

  The ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is sent to the second ball sending passage 3770, and the inside of the second ball sending passage 3770 is sent from the left end to the right end. The ball fed to the right end of the second ball sending passage 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 disposed on the front side, and passes through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 Later, it is guided along the projecting end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falls downward, and after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, The ball is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the mounting member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting apparatus 3700, the ball entering from the second winning opening 640 can be detected by the sensor SE disposed on the right side of the winning member 3730 in a front view, so that the ball passing passage from the second winning opening 640 is newly added. There is no need to arrange the sensor SE. That is, since the sensor SE detecting the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 can also play the role of the sensor SE detecting the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described. (A) and (b) of FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, the ball enters from the first winning opening 64 and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and the ball enters from the second winning opening 640 and is fed to the bending member 3740. When the ball to be thrown to the back side is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may abut each other and the balls may be clogged.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter referred to as a “lower ball”) which is sent from the second winning opening 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is referred to from the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown and sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740 and collides with a ball falling from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as “upper ball”) By catching the front end of the second through hole 3733, the ball can not move and the ball may be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper ball is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the opposing sides of the second opening 3746 to lower the ball. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740 by canceling the balance between the ball and the upper ball.

  That is, when the upper ball rides on the lower ball to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction where the upper ball is located, and the upper balls are mutually The upper sphere is sent to the inside of either the left or right second opening 3744 because it is inclined to the left or right due to the spherical shape. This makes it possible to eliminate the balance between the lower ball and the upper ball. Accordingly, clogging of the ball in the ball sending path of the bending member 3740 can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 55, the distribution apparatus 4700 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the distribution device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 4700 at line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55 (a). (C) is a sectional view of distribution device 4700 in the LVc-LVc line of Drawing 55 (b). In FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the passage path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the distribution apparatus 4700 in the fourth embodiment has a winning opening on the outer lower side of the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the left and right direction (FIG. 55 (a) horizontal). 4063 is provided.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass inside, and is disposed on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 is connected to the third connection hole 4752a of the interposing member 4750, which will be described later, on the back surface side, and the ball entering the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

  The recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 4750 is formed by being bent downward at the tip of the second ball sending path KR2, and a path (sixth ball sending path KR6) is formed in which the ball passes through the inside to be sent downward. Ru. That is, the sixth ball sending route KR6 and the second ball sending route KR2 are connected.

  A third connection hole 4752a protruding to the left and right sides is formed in the sixth ball sending path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is disposed in a lower part of the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752 a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown to the inside of the third connection hole 4752a and is thrown to the sixth throwing path.

  In addition, on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE disposed in the sixth ball sending path KR6 is disposed. Thereby, the sphere which entered into the inside of the 3rd connecting hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thereby, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win the winning opening 4063. That is, the ball guided to the bending member 740 not only passes the sensor SE, but also flows out from the opening 744 to the game area, and further, the spilled ball enters the winning opening 4063 and the sensor SE2 A passing form can be formed, and an interest can be given to the game.

  It should be noted that the winning opening 4063 may be disposed at a position where it can receive all of the balls that flowed out of the opening 744 into the game area, or partially depending on the state of the balls flowed out of the opening 744 into the game area The ball may be disposed at a position where it can be accepted and some of the balls can not be accepted.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first throwing passage KR1 and the second throwing passage KR2, the first throwing passage KR1 can be obtained by paying out a ball that is likely to cause ball clogging from the opening to the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the connecting portion between the second and third ball sending routes KR2.

  Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and the ball enters the winning opening 4063. It is possible to make it easy to give the player an interest.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to the upper side of the sensor SE disposed in the sixth ball sending path KR6, so that the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 merely passes the sensor SE2 disposed in the third connection hole 4752a. Instead, it passes through the sensor SE disposed in the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, since it is possible to pass the two sensors by the ball entering from the winning opening 4063, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  In addition, since the balls to be sent to the bending member 740 are distributed left and right for each ball by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion of the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2. Can be suppressed to be thrown. Therefore, it can suppress that a ball is clogged in the connection part of 1st ball sending course KR1 and 2nd ball sending course KR2.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, the vertical displacement unit 5400 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the roller 481 of the rotation restriction member 480. However, in the fifth embodiment, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430. It will be. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the state in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the raised position is the second position, and the state in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is the first embodiment. Although the position has been described, in the fifth embodiment, the state in which the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the rising position from the second position will be described as the third position.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the first position, the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the central opening of the center frame 600 in a front view as in the first embodiment. An effect of rotating the 5500 is performed. In the state where the decoration member 5450 is disposed at the second position, the decoration member 5450 is above the central opening of the center frame 600 (in the direction of arrow U) and on the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) Be placed. In this case, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430 described later. That is, at the second position, as in the first embodiment, the retracting position of the decorative member 5450 is set.

  Furthermore, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, the rotating unit 5500 disposed on the decorative member 5450 is viewed from the front through an opening (not shown) which penetrates above the center frame 600 of the game board 13 Are configured to be visible. Thereby, the rotation unit 5500 can be rotated at the third position to allow the player to visually recognize the effect.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 57A and 57B are front views of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400. FIG. FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which the front cover 5460 is viewed as transparent.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively. Moreover, in the following drawings, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit is schematically illustrated.

  Furthermore, in the following description, the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 5500 is in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), with the decorative member 5450 of the vertical displacement unit 5400 disposed at the third position, unless otherwise specified. A state of being arranged in parallel (hereinafter referred to as an initial position of the rotation unit 5500) will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the vertical displacement unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is superimposed on the front base 5410 formed in a box shape and the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. A front cover 5460, a drive motor 441 disposed on the back side of the front base 5410, and a front base 5410 and a front cover 5460 are supported so as to be axially supported and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. Displacement member 5430, a decoration member 5450 connected to one side of the displacement member 5430 and displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) along with the rotation of the displacement member 5430, and inserted into the decoration member 5450 And a guide rod P1 disposed between the facing of the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460.

  In the vertical displacement unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment, all members except for the decorative member 5450 are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction as in the first embodiment, and the decorative member 5450 is interposed between the pair of facing members. Be done. Further, the detailed description of the members disposed in a pair only describes the members disposed on the left side in the front view (arrow L direction), and the members disposed on the right side in the front view (arrow R direction) The same reference numerals as those in the left side of the front view are attached to the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The front base 5410 includes a first piece 5410X extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), and a first piece 5410X disposed in a pair in the left-right direction from a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 5410X. And a second piece 5410Y that bulges outward in the opposing direction of the

  The first piece 5410 X has an upper groove 413 recessed at the upper end in an arc shape in cross section, a lower groove 414 recessed in an arc shape in the lower end side, and a far side from the rotation unit 5500 (arrow L And an erected portion 5412 erected on the front cover 5460 side (arrow F direction side) along the edge of the direction).

  The upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 are grooves for arranging the guide rod P1 at the inner edge thereof, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed coaxially with the axis of the portion concaved in a semicircular arc shape in cross section, and from the upper end of the upper concave groove 413 to the lower end of the lower concave groove 414 The distance between the facing to the part is set smaller than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be disposed at the inner edge of the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The standing portion 5412 is disposed in contact with a front cover 5460 disposed on the front side. Thus, a space can be formed between the facing of the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460, and the space can be communicated from the side surface on the rotation unit 5500 side to the external space. As a result, the decorative member 5450 can be disposed between the facing of the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460, and the decorative member 5450 can be slidingly displaced in the vertical direction.

  Further, the erected portion 5412 includes a notch 5412 a partially recessed at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 5410 X extending in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D), and the notch 5412 a The second piece 5410Y is formed along the bottom surface of the notch.

  As described above, the second piece 5410Y is formed by connecting with the notch 5412a of the first piece 5410X, and is formed so as to expand in a semicircular shape in a front view in the direction (arrow L direction) away from the rotation unit 5500. . The second piece 5410Y mainly includes an opening 5411 that opens in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction), and a pivot portion 5416 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side. The erected portion 5412 of the first piece 5410X is erected along the front edge of the second piece 5410Y.

  The opening 5411 has the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the front base 5410 and the transmission gear 442 fitted to the rotation shaft the front side of the front base 5410 (arrow F direction) The inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 442 fitted to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to aged deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the opening 5411 with the transmission gear 442 attached. Therefore, after the transmission gear 442 is fitted to the rotational shaft of the new drive motor 441 that has been replaced, the transmission gear 442 can be inserted through the opening 5411 to arrange the drive motor 441 on the front base 5410. As a result, when replacing the drive motor 441, the drive motor 441 can be disposed on the front base 5410 more easily than in the case where only the drive motor 441 is removed. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 442 can be reliably fitted to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441, the reliability of the product when parts are replaced can be improved.

  The shaft support portion 5416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and its end is fitted to the front side of the front base 5410 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction). Further, at the end on the front side of the shaft support portion 5416, a hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed. Thus, after inserting the shaft support portion 5146 into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443, the transmission gear 443 is fixed to the shaft support portion 5416 by screwing a screw whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443. It can be disposed in the 5410 without being able to drop off.

  The front cover 5460 is formed substantially the same as the front base 5410 whose outer shape in front view is disposed on the back side. The front cover 5460 is provided on the side of the front base 5410 from the bearing portion 5464 projecting toward the front base 5410 from the surface facing the front base 5410, and the facing portion of the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 of the front base 5410. It comprises an upper groove forming member 462 and a lower groove forming member 463 which are provided in a protruding manner.

  The shaft support portion 5464 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and its end is fitted to the back surface side of the front cover 5460 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction). Further, at the rear end of the shaft support 5464, a hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed. Thus, after inserting the shaft support portion 5464 into the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430 described later, the displacement member is screwed with a screw whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430. 5430 can be disposed on the front cover 5460 so as not to fall off.

  The displacement member 5430 is formed in a rectangular shape, one of which is long in front view, and is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed in a long hole elongated in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 And a through hole 433 located between the connection shaft 5435 and the drive-side sliding groove 431 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The through hole 433 is a hole pivotally supported by the pivot support portion 5464 of the front cover 5460 as described above, and is formed in a portion disposed between the front base 5410 of the displacement member 5430 and the front cover 5460 facing each other. . In addition, the distance from the center of the through hole 433 to the end on the other side in the longitudinal direction (drive side sliding groove 431) is formed on the second piece 5410Y of the front base 5410 from the pivot 5546 of the front cover 5460 It is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension to the side surface on the side of the shaft support portion 5464 of the standing portion 5412. Thus, when the displacement member 5430 is rotated around the pivot 5546, the end of the displacement member 5430 can be prevented from contacting the standing portion 5412.

  The connecting shaft 5435 is inserted into a sliding groove 5452j of a decorative member 5450 described later. Thus, the decorative member 5450 can be driven along the axial direction (arrow U-D direction) of the guide rod P1 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the displacement member 5430.

  The decorative member 5450 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and horizontally long, and is a front base 5452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 5452, and a back surface of the front base 5452 And a rotation unit 5500 rotatably provided on the front side of the front base 5452.

  Like the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 5452 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long rectangular shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower end portions are bent back. The front base 5452 is provided with a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole elongated in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450, and the rotation unit 5500 is disposed rotatably in a substantially middle position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450.

  The sliding groove 5452 j is a portion into which the connection shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430 is inserted as described above, and when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, the connection shaft 5435 is of the sliding groove 5452 j. The interior is slid to displace the decorative member 5450.

  The rotation unit 5500 has an upper surface base 5510 which forms the upper side surface of the rotation unit 5500, an irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the upper surface base 5510, and is arranged below the irradiation unit 530. An intermediate member 5540 to be provided, a reflecting plate 560 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) disposed in front of the reflecting plate 560, and an upper surface It is mainly provided with the rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and the lower surface base 5520 forming the lower side surface of the rotation unit 5500. .

  In addition, the rotation unit 5500 is configured in a rectangular shape, one of which is long in front view, and the recess 5514 is rotated at both longitudinal ends of the rotation unit 5500 of the upper surface base 5510, the intermediate member 5540 and the lower surface base 5520 that constitute the outer surface. It is recessed toward the inside in the longitudinal direction of the unit 5500.

  As in the first embodiment, the rotation unit 5500 is configured as a versa writer that produces effects by the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, and the rotation transmission unit 570 is similar to the first embodiment. The rotation of the rear base 571 is performed about the center of the gear 571a1. Further, in FIG. 57 to FIG. 62, the rotation axis of the rotation unit 5500 is illustrated with the reference of the rotation axis O.

  Further, the center of gravity of the rotation unit 5500 is set on the rotation axis O, and the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 5500 is horizontal (the posture shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B). In this case, the rotation unit 5500 is suppressed from rotating about the rotation axis O by its own weight.

  The recess 5514 can receive an end of one side of the displacement member 5430 inside when the decoration member 5450 is disposed at the second position. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted. A detailed description of the regulation of the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 will be described later.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 59, the displacement aspect of the decoration member 5450 is demonstrated. FIG. 59 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the third position, and FIG. 59 (b) is a state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the second position. FIG. 59 (c) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the first position. Further, in FIG. 59 (a) or FIG. 59 (c), the front cover 5460 is illustrated in a state of being viewed as transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, the end of the other side (the drive-side sliding hole 431 side) of the displacement member 5430 is lower than the through hole 433. The end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is disposed above the through hole 433 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 is horizontal. It is in a state of being inclined with respect to (the direction of the arrow L-R).

  In this case, an imaginary line KS1 (see FIG. 59A) connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 (the center of the shaft support 5416) and the axis of the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is the axis of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430. And the axis of the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 are substantially orthogonal to a virtual line KS2 (see FIG. 59A). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member 5430 is rotated by the load of the decoration member 5450.

  That is, since the decoration member 5450 is supported by the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430, the load of the decoration member 5450 acts on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 5430, and the displacement member 5430 is the load of the decoration member 5450 By disposing the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 substantially orthogonal to each other and setting a dead center relationship, the transmission gear 443 is prevented from rotating by the force acting from the displacement member 5430. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member 5430 is rotated by the load of the decoration member 5450.

  Next, the case where the decoration member 5450 is displaced from the third position shown in FIG. 59 (a) to the second position shown in FIG. 59 (b) will be described. The displacement of the decoration member 5450 from the third position to the second position is performed by driving the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 58) described above. When the decorative member 5450 is displaced to each position (from the first position to the third position), the rotation unit 5500 is stopped at the initial position.

  The drive motor 441 is engaged with the transmission gear 442 on the rotation shaft as described above. Also, the transmission gear 442 is meshed with the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when power is applied to the drive motor 441 and the rotation shaft is rotated, the rotational drive is transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442. When the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side sliding groove 431 of the displacement member 5430 to rotate the displacement member 5430. In this case, in the displacement member 5430, the end on one longitudinal side (the connection shaft 5435 side) is displaced downward (in the direction of the arrow D) in the direction of gravity.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission gear 442 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441 is rotated leftward in a front view (the drive motor 441 disposed on the front base 5410 on the right is opposite). The end of the other longitudinal side (the connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is displaced downward (in the direction of the arrow D) in the direction of gravity.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the displacement member 5430 is disposed at the second position, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decoration member 5450. Further, in this case, the end of one longitudinal side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is disposed inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500 and in the rotation area RY2 of the rotation unit 5500 (see FIG. 60). It is placed inside. Thus, when the displacement member 5430 is disposed at the second position, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be restricted.

  Here, conventionally, the base member, the first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, the interposed member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member, and the first displacement member are driven There is known a gaming machine provided with a first drive means for moving the second displacement member and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member. According to this conventional gaming machine, the first displacement member disposed in the opening upper portion of the center frame (the upper portion of the gaming machine) is moved to the opening central portion of the center frame (the center of the gaming machine) by the first drive means. Thus, the second displacement member can be displaced.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement member is disposed at the upper opening of the center frame, it is necessary to dispose a member for restricting the displacement of the second displacement member in the displacement region of the second displacement member. . Therefore, there has been a problem that the number of parts increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the second position, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be restricted by the displacement member 5430 that displaces the decorative member 5450. That is, the displacing member 5430 can be used both for displacing the decorative member 5450 in the vertical direction and for restraining the rotation of the rotation unit 5500. As a result, since it is not necessary to newly provide a member for restricting the rotation of the rotation unit 5500, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, only by disposing the displacement member 5430 in the rotation area of the rotation unit 5500 in order to restrict the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 that is rotated, rotation of the rotation unit 5500 in one direction by one displacement member 5430 Although it is possible to regulate the rotation in the arranged direction, there is a problem that it is not possible to regulate the rotation in the other direction.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since one end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500, rotation of the rotation unit 5500 in both directions is performed when the rotation unit 5500 rotates. It can be regulated by the displacement member 5430.

  In this case, since rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted, the rotation unit 5500 is input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the power of the drive motor 457 (see FIG. 26) for driving the rotation unit 5500 is turned off. It can suppress rotating by vibration etc. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430, the supply of power to the drive motor 457 for driving the rotation unit 5500 can be cut off, so the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly. Can.

  Furthermore, when the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the second position, the distance L2 between the protrusion 443a sliding inside the drive-side sliding groove 431 of the displacement member 5430 and the rotation shaft of the displacement member 5430 (FIG. b) is set larger than the separation distance L1 (see FIG. 59A) between the protrusion 443a and the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 when the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the third position. Thus, when an external force acts on one end of the displacement member 5430, the transmission gear 443 can be prevented from rotating.

  The larger the distance L 2 is set, the easier it is for the transmission gear 443 to rotate when external force is applied to one end of the displacement member 5430, and the rotation shaft of the displacement member 5430 is It is preferable that the distance L3 be set larger than the separation distance L3 (see FIG. 59 (b)) between the connector shaft 5435 and the connector shaft 5435.

  Next, the case where the decoration member 5450 is displaced from the second position shown in FIG. 59 (b) to the first position shown in FIG. 59 (c) will be described. The displacement of the decorative member 5450 from the second position to the first position is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441, similarly to the displacement of the decorative member 5450 from the third position to the second position described above. When the drive motor 441 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j of the displacement member 5430 to rotate the displacement member 5430.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the first position, the other end (the drive side sliding hole 431 side) of the displacement member 5430 is above the through hole 433. The end of the displacement member 5430 located on one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is disposed below the through hole 433 (in the direction of the arrow D). The displacement member 5430 is rotated approximately 90 degrees with respect to the displacement member 5430 in the state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the third position, and is inclined with respect to the horizontal direction (the arrow L-R direction). It will be in the state.

  In this case, the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 are substantially orthogonal to each other, as in the case where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position. Accordingly, rotation of displacement member 5430 by an external force acting on decoration member 5450 can be suppressed.

  That is, at the first position, since the rotation unit 5500 disposed in the decorative member 5450 is rotationally displaced, the inertial force due to the rotational drive of the rotation unit 5500 acts on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 5430 to displace it. The position of the transfer line 443 is displaced by arranging the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 so as to be substantially orthogonal to each other so that the member 5430 is easily displaced by the inertial force of the rotational drive of the rotation unit 5500. The force acting from member 5430 can prevent it from rotating. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member 5430 is rotated by an external force acting on the decoration member 5450.

  In the first position and the third position, the connection shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430 is on the left side (arrow L direction) of the sliding groove 5452j on the far side from the rotation unit 5500 (the front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400). The connecting shaft 5435 disposed is in contact with the left end portion of the sliding groove 5452j. As described above, since the connecting shafts 5435 are provided as a pair on the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 5400, the pair of sliding grooves 5452j formed in the decorative member 5450 at two locations sandwiching the rotating unit 5500 therebetween. On the other hand, the connecting shaft 5435 can be brought into contact with the end remote from the rotation unit 5500, respectively. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the decorative member 5450 swings in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 5452j (arrow L-R direction).

  Here, as described above, at the first position or the third position, an effect of rotating the rotation unit 5500 is performed. Therefore, the inertial force by the rotational drive of the rotation unit 5500 is transmitted to the decoration member 5450, and the decoration member 5450 swings in the left-right direction, which may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect of the rotation unit 5500.

  On the other hand, in the first position or the third position, the connection shaft 5435 of the pair of displacement members 5430 disposed inside the pair of sliding grooves 5452j of the decoration member 5450 causes the displacement of the decoration member 5450 in the left-right direction. Since regulation is performed, rotational driving of the rotation unit 5500 can suppress the decorative member 5450 from swinging in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the effect by the rotation drive of the rotation unit 5500 (in the present embodiment, the afterimage display of light by the versa writer).

  When the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the first position to the third position or from the third position to the first position via the second position, as shown in FIG. 59, the rotational unit 5500 is necessarily disposed at the initial position. There is no need to do it. The rotation unit 5500 may be arranged at the initial position only when the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted. For example, in the case where the rotation unit 5500 is rotated at the third position after the rotation unit 5500 is rotated at the first position, the rotation unit 5500 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the initial position at the first position. By displacing the decoration member 5450 to the third position, contact of the rotation unit 5500 with the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is not necessary to consider the positional deviation of the rotation unit 5500 when the speed of displacement of the decoration member 5450 is increased, so that the speed of displacement of the decoration member 5450 can be increased. It can be changed smoothly.

  In this case, the displacement member 5430 is moved to the inside of the rotation area RY2 of the rotation unit 5500 while causing the rotation unit 5500 to render rotation to a position before the one side of the displacement member 5430 is displaced inside the rotation area RY2 of the rotation unit 5500. In the case where one side is disposed, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is stopped or the rotation is delayed to displace the decoration member 5450 and the collision of the rotation unit 5500 with the displacement member 5430 is suppressed. Furthermore, after one side of the displacement member 5430 is displaced to the outside of the rotation area RY2, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restarted or normal rotation is performed, and the rotation by the rotation unit 5500 is rendered, whereby It is possible to make the player visually recognize an aspect in which the decorative member 5450 is displaced in a state where the rotation effect is continued. As a result, the effect area by the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be expanded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a state in which the decoration member 5450 is disposed at the second position and rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the second position. In FIG. 60, the locus of the end in the longitudinal direction when the rotation unit 5500 is rotated is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of the rotation area RY2. Further, in FIG. 60, a straight line in the horizontal direction orthogonal to the rotation axis O of the rotation unit 5500 is denoted by a symbol of a virtual line KS5 and illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, in FIG. 60, the sliding groove 5452 j and the connecting shaft 5435 are illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the width L4 in the short direction of the rotation unit 5500 in a front view is set larger than the width L5 in the short direction of the displacement member 5430. Further, one end portion of the displacement member 5430 is formed in a circular arc shape with the center of the connecting shaft 5435 formed in a cylindrical shape as an axis. Accordingly, when the decoration member 5450 is displaced to the second position, one side of the displacement member 5430 can be easily disposed inside the recess 5514. A detailed description of the arrangement of the one side of the displacement member 5430 inside the recess 5514 will be described later.

  When the decoration member 5450 is disposed at the second position, the end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is disposed inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500 disposed at the initial position. In this case, the end on one side of the displacement member 5430 is in contact with the bottom of the recess 5514. That is, the distance dimension L6 between the concave bottom surfaces formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 5500 is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the one side end portions of the pair of displacement members 5430. Thus, when the stop position of the rotation unit 5500 is shifted from the initial position, one end of the displacement member 5430 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 5514 to displace the rotation unit 5500 to the initial position. be able to.

  In the recess 5514, the axis of the arc in a front view is set coaxial with the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the second position and the rotation unit 5500 is disposed at the initial position. Thus, when the displacement member 5430 is rotated to displace the decorative member 5450 from the first position or the third position to the second position, the end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is inside the recess 5514 When displacing the displacement member 5430 from the second position to the first position or the third position, one side of the displacement member 5430 can be easily extracted from the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500. In addition, when the rotation unit 5500 rotates, the displacement can be easily regulated by the displacement member 5430.

  Specifically, when the rotation unit 5500 is disposed at the initial position, the displacement locus of the end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is formed at a position not in contact with the outer shape of the rotation unit 5500 can do. Accordingly, when the displacement member 5430 is rotated, one side of the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed from contacting the rotation unit 5500. Further, the area of the displacement member 5430 disposed in the displacement region of the recess 5514 can be increased. Therefore, when the rotating member 500 rotates in a state where one side of the displacing member 5430 is inserted inside the concave portion 5514, the rotating member 500 can be easily brought into contact with the displacing member 5430, restricting the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 5500 It can be easy.

  In this case, the end of one side of the displacement member 5430 (the insertion portion into the recess 5514) is formed in a curved shape smaller than the arc shape of the recess 5514, as shown in FIG. Thus, the displacement member 5430 can be easily inserted into the inner portion of the recess 5514.

  In addition, the displacement members 5430 are disposed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the rotation unit 5500, and when the decoration member 5450 is disposed at the second position, both left and right sides of the rotation unit 5500 are provided. One side of the displacement member 5430 is disposed inside the recess 5514 of the Therefore, when the rotational driving force is applied to the rotation unit 5500 in a state in which the rotation is restricted due to poor control of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the left and right displacement members 5430 are opposite in direction as the rotation unit 5500 rotates. Will be rotated. As described above, in the displacement member 5430, since the connecting shaft 5435 on one side is connected to the sliding groove 5452j of the front base 5452, when the pair of displacement members 5430 are rotationally displaced in opposite directions, the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed from rotating.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the case where one side of the displacement member 5430 is extracted from the inside of the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500 will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400. In FIG. 61, a state in which the decoration member 5450 is slightly displaced from the second position to the third position and one end of the displacement member 5430 is extracted from the inside of the rotation unit 5500 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when the decoration member 5450 is slightly displaced from the second position to the third position and one side of the displacement member 5430 is disposed outside the rotation area RY2 of the rotation unit 5500, the rotation unit 5500 is When it rotates, it can be in the state which does not contact with displacement member 5430. That is, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is permitted.

  Here, conventionally, a base member, a first displacement member displaced with respect to the base member between a retracted position and a first position, and a second displacement member displaced with respect to the first displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known. According to this gaming machine, the first displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be displaced to the first position to displace the second displacement member.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when stopping the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the gaming machine. By displacement of the displacement member, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, it is possible to arrange the second displacement member on the back side of the center frame at the retracted position to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position. There is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced as the frame is enlarged.

  In addition, when the second displacement member is disposed at the retracted position, it is also conceivable to abut a part of the center frame on the second displacement member to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member, but in this case, When it is necessary to allow the displacement of the second displacement member, it is necessary to sufficiently separate the second displacement member from the center frame, and accordingly, the effect area by the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. there were.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one side end of the displacement member 5430 is separated from the bottom surface of the recess 5514 by the distance L7 (see FIG. 61) between the rotation region RY2. Since the rotation can be permitted, the effect area by the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be expanded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the case where the rotation stop position of the rotation unit 5500 is shifted from the initial position will be described. 62 (a) and 62 (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 5400. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the rotation unit 5500 is stopped at a position shifted from the initial position, the rotation unit 5500 is initially set by pressing the inside of the recess 5514 at one end of the displacement member 5430. Can be placed. 62 (a) to 62 (c), a state in which the rotation unit 5500 is pressed and displaced by the displacement member 5430 from the state where one side of the displacement member 5430 abuts on the rotation unit 5500 is illustrated.

  As described above, since one end of the rotating member is formed in an arc shape with the center of the connecting shaft 5435 as the axis, the decorative member 5450 is displaced and the connecting shaft 5435 slides in the sliding groove 5452j. In this case, the end on the virtual line KS5 can be positioned on the rotation unit 5500 side. Thereby, when the longitudinal direction both ends (recessed part 5514) of rotation unit 5500 are arranged in the position which does not exceed imaginary line KS5, the longitudinal direction both ends of rotation unit 5500 It can be made to abut on the outer surface of the displacement member 5430 located on the opposite side. Therefore, when one side of the displacement member 5430 abuts on both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 5500, the rotation unit 5500 can be pushed in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of misalignment. As a result, when the rotation unit 5500 is disposed at a position deviated from the initial position, the displacement member 5430 can push back the rotation unit 5500 to the initial position.

  Since one end of the displacement member 5430 abuts on the recess 5514 formed on both ends of the rotation unit 5500 in the longitudinal direction, the curvature of the recess 5514 is used to make the rotation unit 5500 opposite to the rotational direction of misalignment. It is easy to rotate in the direction of. That is, the rotation unit 5500 can be easily displaced to the initial position by bringing the rotation unit 5500 into contact with the displacement member 5430.

  Further, as a factor of stopping the rotation unit 5500 at a position deviated from the initial position, the rotation unit 5500 is formed on the gear 456 (see FIG. 26) described in the first embodiment when the rotation unit 5500 stops at the initial position. In order to perform the stopping operation after the protruding projections are disposed between the detection sensors, it is a factor that the position is slightly shifted in the rotating direction and the stop is made, and the longitudinal both ends of the rotating unit 5500 do not exceed the imaginary line KS5 When positioned, the protrusions of the gear 456 are sized to be disposed between the detection sensors. Thus, displacement members 5430 arranged on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of rotation unit 5500 can be engaged via rotation unit 5500, and the displacement of displacement member 5430 can be restrained.

  In addition, when the stop position of the rotation unit 5500 is disposed at a position where the both ends of the rotation unit 5500 are deviated beyond the virtual line KS5, the protrusion of the gear 456 is pulled out from between the detection sensors, thereby providing a pachinko machine. At 10, it can be recognized that the stop position of the rotation unit 5500 is shifted (the position is shifted too much). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a signal to rotate the rotation unit 5500 again and causes the rotation unit 5500 to stop operation again, so that the stop position of the rotation unit 5500 is the virtual line KS5 at both ends of the rotation unit 5500. It can be placed at a position not exceeding.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the vertical displacement unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by arranging the end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 inside the concave portion 5514 of the rotation unit 5500 has been described. In the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 6430 regulates the rotation of the gear for rotationally displacing the rotation unit 500. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 6400. In FIG. 63 (a), the vertical displacement unit 6400 in a state in which the front cover 5460 is viewed as transparent is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 63 (b), a part of the mechanism for displacing the rotation unit 500 and the decoration member 5450 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the vertical displacement unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 6430 is formed longer on one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) than the displacement member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. Further, the displacement member 6430 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decorative member 5450 and the guide rod P1.

  The displacement member 6430 has a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in a long hole elongated in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 6430, and a connecting shaft 5435 projecting on the decoration member 6450 side on one side in the longitudinal direction. A through hole 433 located between the connecting shaft 5435 and the drive-side sliding groove 431 and penetrating in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B), and one side longer than the connecting shaft 435 And a control protrusion 6436 protruding to the side.

  The control protrusion 6436 is formed in a cylindrical shape in front view. In addition, the protruding end of the restriction projection 6436 has a length that can be received inside the recessed groove 6456a formed in the pinion gear 456 rotated with the rotation of the rotation unit 500 disposed in the decoration member 6450 described later. It is set. Therefore, the restriction projection 6436 is received inside the recessed groove 6456a, whereby the rotation of the pinion gear 456 is restricted, and the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted.

  The decorative member 6450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes a front base 5452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 5452, and a back surface of the front base 5452 It mainly includes a rear base 6453 to be disposed, and a rotation unit 500 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front base 5452.

  The back surface base 6453 is a plate member formed so as to have substantially the same outer shape as the front surface base 5452 in a front view. Further, gears 454, 455, and 6456 (gears 454 and 455 are not shown) are disposed rotatably in an internal space between the front base 5452 and the back base 6453.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the sliding groove 5452 j formed in the front base 5452 in the fifth embodiment is formed in the back base 6453. In addition, the back surface base 6453 is formed with a curved concave portion 6453e along the displacement locus of the control protrusion 6436 in a back view when the displacement member 6430 is rotated. The concave portion 6453 e is formed such that the width dimension in the radial direction is larger than the diameter of the control protrusion 6436. Thus, when the displacement member 6430 is rotated, the control protrusion 6436 can be moved inside the recessed portion 6453e, and the control protrusion 6436 can be suppressed from colliding with the back surface base 6453.

  As described above, the gear 456 is formed to have the same diameter as the gear 571a1 transmitting the drive to the rotation unit 500, and is meshed with the gear 571a1. Thus, the gear 456 is disposed at the same rotational position each time the rotation unit 500 is rotated. Further, in the gear 6456, a protrusion for detecting the initial position (reference position) of the rotation unit 500 is protruded on the side surface (end face in the axial direction), and when the protrusion rotates once, the rotation unit 500 is at the initial position. The pachinko machine 10 can be made to detect that it was arrange | positioned. Further, the gear 456 is provided with a recessed groove 6456a which is recessed in a curved shape from the back side to the front side.

  When the decoration member 6450 is arranged at the second position and the rotation unit 500 is arranged at the initial position, the concave groove 6456a has the axis of curvature of the concave groove 6456a the rotation axis of the displacement member 6430 (the support portion 5464 Center) and coaxial. Further, the width dimension in the radial direction of the recessed groove 6456a is set larger than the diameter of the restricting protrusion 6436 described above. Accordingly, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the initial position, the control protrusion 6436 of the displacement member 6430 can be disposed inside the recessed groove 6456a by rotationally displacing the displacement member 6430. As a result, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be restricted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a state in which the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted by the restriction projection 6436 of the displacement member 6430 will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 6400 in a state where the decorative member 6450 is disposed at the second position, and FIG. 64 (b) is a rear view of the gear 456. In FIG. 64 (a), a part of a mechanism for displacing the rotation unit 500 and the decoration member 5450 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 64 (b), the tooth flanks of the gear engraved on the front side of the gear 456 are illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the recessed groove 6456a is formed at a position avoiding the rotation axis of the gear 456. Therefore, when the control protrusion 6436 is disposed inside the recessed groove 6456a, the inner surface of the recessed groove 6456a can be brought into contact with the control protrusion 6436 when the gear 456 rotates. Therefore, since the rotation of the gear 456 is restricted, the rotation of the gear 571a1 engaged with the gear 456 is restricted. As described above, since the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the transmission of the drive from the gear 571a1, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted by restricting the rotation of the gear 571a1.

  In this case, it is not necessary for the displacement member 6430 to abut on the outer surface of the rotation unit 500 in order to restrict the rotation of the rotation unit 500, so that the player visually recognizes the contact between the rotation unit 500 and the displacement member 6430. It can be difficult. That is, since the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be restricted by the gear 456, the gear 456 is disposed on the back side of the front base 6452 and is disposed at a position where it is difficult to be visually recognized from the front side (player side). The restricted portion of the rotation unit 500 can be made less visible to the player. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the structure that regulates the rotation of the rotation unit 500, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Further, when the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted by the restriction projection 6436 (when the decoration member 6450 is disposed at the second position), the recessed groove 6456 a is a rotation shaft of the displacement member 6430 Of the axial end faces of the gear 456 divided into two by a virtual imaginary line KS3 (see FIG. 64 (b)) which is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the center of the gear 456 and the center of the gear 456 and passes through the rotation axis of the gear 456. , And is formed in a region RY1 (see FIG. 64B) close to the rotation axis of the displacement member 6430.

  Here, in the case where the recessed groove 6456a is formed at a location other than the region R1 of the gear 456, the bending direction of the recessed groove 6456a approximates the rotation direction of the gear 456. Therefore, when the gear 456 is rotated, the restriction projection 6436 can easily slide inside the recessed groove 6456a, and the range in which the rotation unit 500 can rotate becomes large before the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted. There is a problem of that.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, since the recessed groove 6456a is formed in the region R1 of the gear 456, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the inner surface of the recessed groove 6456a abuts on the regulating projection 6436. The rotation distance of the rotation unit 500 can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the range in which the rotation unit 500 can rotate before the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted.

  In addition, the groove width of the recessed groove 6456a is reduced from the periphery of the gear 456 toward the inner portion. Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed at a position slightly deviated from the initial position, the decoration member 6450 is displaced from the first position or the third position to the second position, and the control projection 6436 is formed in the recessed groove 6456a. The rotary unit 500 can be rotated to the initial position by being disposed inside and being in contact with the inner surface of the recessed groove 6456a to rotate the gear 456.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 rotatably disposed in the decorative member 5450 is restricted is described, but in the seventh embodiment, in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction) The case of restricting the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 disposed in a displaceable state will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. 65 (a) and 65 (b) are perspective front views of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are top views of the vertical displacement unit 7400. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the decorative member 7450 of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment is supported by the displacement members 5430 disposed at the left and right ends as in the fifth embodiment, and the displacement thereof By rotating the member 5430, the decorative member 7450 is displaced to the first to third positions. The configuration for displacing the displacement member 5430 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The decorative member 7450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes a front base 7452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 (not shown) connected to both lateral ends of the front base 7452, and a front base A rear surface base 7453 covering the rear surface of the 7452 and a displacement unit 7900 disposed so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front base 7452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 7452 is formed of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontally long shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower end portions are bent to the back side. The front base 7452 includes an opening 7452k that opens in the front-rear direction at a substantially middle position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450, and a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole elongated in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 7450.

  In the opening 7452k, a shaft portion 7912 of a solenoid 7910 for transmitting a drive to a displacement unit 7900 described later is inserted. Thus, the drive of the solenoid 7910 is transmitted to the displacement unit 7900 via the opening 7452k, and the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in the front-rear direction. A detailed description of driving of the solenoid 7910 will be described later.

  The back surface base 7453 is a plate member formed so as to have substantially the same outer shape as the front surface base 7452 in a front view. Further, the rear surface base 7453 has an opening (not shown) opened at a position facing the opening 7452k formed in the front base 7452, and the shaft 7912 is inserted through the opening. A main body 7911 is disposed on the back side of the back base 7453.

  The solenoid 7910 includes a main body 7911 that generates a magnetic force by the application of electric power, a shaft 7912 that can be projected and retracted inside the main body 7911, and the shaft 7912 from the main body 7911. In the case where a coil spring (not shown) is provided to urge in a projecting direction and power is not applied to the main body 7911, the shaft 7912 is protruded from the main body 7911 by the urging force of the coil spring. When power is applied to the main body 7911, the magnetic force of the main body 7911 sinks the shaft 7912 into the main body 7911.

  A displacement unit 7900 is disposed at the tip of the shaft portion 7912 of the solenoid 7910. Therefore, the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction) according to the displacement of the shaft portion 7912.

  When the shaft 7912 of the solenoid 7910 is inserted into the main body 7911, the front end of the displacement unit 7900 is positioned on the back of the pair of displacement members 5430 (see FIG. 66 (a)). ). On the other hand, when the shaft 7912 of the solenoid 7910 protrudes from the inside of the main body 7911, the rear end of the displacement unit 7900 is positioned on the front side of the pair of displacement members 5430 (FIG. 66 (b)) reference).

  That is, in the displacement unit 7900, the displacement end positions are set on both sides of the displacement member 5430 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Thereby, when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced in a state where the displacement unit 7900 is disposed on either the front side or the back side, collision of the displacement member 5430 with the displacement unit 7900 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the case of restricting the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 will be described. FIG. 67 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in a state where the decorative member 7450 is disposed at the second position, and FIG. 67 (b) is vertical displacement in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). FIG. 70 is a top view of a unit 7400. FIG. 68 (a) is a top view of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in a state in which the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is restricted, and FIG. 68 (b) is a vertical displacement unit 7400 along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a). FIG. In FIGS. 67 (a) and 68 (a), a part of the displacement unit 7900 overlapping the displacement member 5430 is illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line. Further, in FIG. 68 (b), a part of the displacement member 5430 overlapping the displacement unit 7900 is illustrated by a dashed dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the decorative member 7450 is disposed at the second position in a state in which the displacement unit 7900 is retracted to the back side (the shaft portion 7912 is retracted inside the main body portion 7911 of the solenoid 7910), The end of one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is disposed in front of the displacement unit 7900.

  As described above, the displacement unit 7900 is displaceable on both sides sandwiching the displacement member 5430 in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68, with the displacement member 5430 disposed on the front side of the displacement unit 7900, if the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in a state of projecting to the front side, the front end of the displacement unit 7900 Contacts the displacement member 5430 to restrict the displacement of the displacement unit 7900.

  In this case, the displacement unit 7900 displaces in the direction of the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 and abuts against the displacement member 5430. Therefore, when the displacement unit 7900 displaces and abuts against the displacement member 5430, the displacement member 5430 rotates. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the solenoid 7910 for driving the displacement unit 7900, the shaft portion 7912 is protruded from the main body portion 7911 by the biasing force of the coil spring. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring can be continuously applied to the displacement unit 7900. Thus, the frictional resistance of the contact surfaces of the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 can be increased, so that the rotational displacement of the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed while the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 are in contact. Therefore, when the power of the drive motor 441 for driving the displacement member 5430 is turned off, it is possible to suppress the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, in the state where displacement unit 7900 abuts on displacement member 5430 and the displacement of displacement unit 7900 is restricted, supply of power to drive motor 441 for driving displacement member 5430 can be cut off. , Energy consumption can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, a recess 7437 is formed in the portion where the displacement member 5430 abuts on the displacement unit 7900. When the decorative member 7450 is disposed at the second position, the recess 7437 is recessed in a shape along the outer shape of the opposing displacement unit 7900. Thus, with the displacement member 5430 disposed on the front side of the displacement unit 7900, when the displacement unit 7900 is displaced to the front side, the portion of the displacement unit 7900 facing the displacement member 5430 is a recessed portion. Accepted by 7437. As a result, when the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 are in contact and the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is restricted, the rotation of the displacement member 5430 is restricted by the inner surface of the recessed portion 7437. it can.

  Therefore, when the power of the drive motor 441 for driving the displacement member 5430 is turned off, it is possible to suppress the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, in the state where displacement unit 7900 abuts on displacement member 5430 and the displacement of displacement unit 7900 is restricted, supply of power to drive motor 441 for driving displacement member 5430 can be cut off. , Energy consumption can be reduced.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 75. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the displacement member 5430 regulates the rotation unit 5500 so as not to rotate. However, in the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 5430 regulates the displacement distance of the displacement unit 8900. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400. FIG. 70 (a) is a front view of the base unit 8950, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 8950 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective front view of a base unit 8950. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, the decorative member 8450 of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment is supported by the displacement members 5430 disposed at the left and right ends as in the fifth embodiment, and the displacement thereof. By rotating the member 5430, the decoration member 8450 is displaced to the first to third positions. The configuration for displacing the displacement member 5430 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Further, the displacement member 5430 of the eighth embodiment is formed longer on one side (the connection shaft 5435 side) than the displacement member 5430 of the fifth embodiment, whereby the displacement of the displacement unit 8900 described later can be restricted. .

  The decorative member 8450 is connected to a base unit 8950 on which a displacement unit 8900 to be described later is disposed, a pair of front bases 8452 connected to both ends of the base unit 8950, and an outer lateral end of the front base 8452 And a sliding portion 451 (not shown).

  The front base 8452 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and is divided at a substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is disposed in pairs on the left and right of the decorative member. Further, the front base 8452 is provided with a sliding groove 5452 j formed in a long hole long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a recess for fastening and fixing a base unit 8950 described later on the rear surface on the center side in the left-right direction. Parts (not shown) are recessed.

  The base unit 8950 is a member for forming a space for sliding the displacement unit 8900 disposed therein, and is a box disposed upward (in the direction of arrow U) and opened downward (in the direction of arrow D). An upper base member 8960 formed in a shape and a lower base member 8970 disposed in the lower part of the upper base member 8960 and formed in a box shape opened upward are formed in the vertical direction.

  The upper base member 8960 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in top view, and the dimension in the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing of the pair of front bases 8452. Further, upper base member 8960 is a facing portion of wall portion 8961 which protrudes in the longitudinal direction from the back side (arrow B direction side) end of both ends in the longitudinal direction and lower base member 8970 on the front side (arrow F direction side) And a drive motor 8963 disposed on the back side of the upper base member 8960.

  The wall 8961 is provided with a screw hole 8961a that opens in the front-rear direction. The wall portion 8961 can fasten and fix the upper base member 8960 to the front base 8452 by screwing a screw to the front base 8452 via the screw hole 8961 a.

  The recessed portion 8962 is a notch for forming an opening for causing a part of the displacement unit 8900 inserted into the base unit 8950 to protrude on the front side (arrow F side) of the base unit 8950. In addition, the recessed portion 8962 is recessed more largely in the left-right direction than the portion to which the displacement unit 8900 communicates. Accordingly, displacement unit 8900 disposed inside base unit 8950 and displaced in the left-right direction can be prevented from contacting the inner edge of recessed portion 8962.

  The drive motor 8963 is disposed on the back side of the upper base member 8960 and has its rotation axis inserted inside the upper base member 8960 through an opening formed on the back side of the upper base member 8960. In addition, a transmission gear 8964 for transmitting the drive to a slide unit 8930 of a displacement unit 8900 described later is disposed on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 8963.

  The lower base member 8970 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the upper base member 8960 described above in a top view. Lower base member 8970 is opposed to wall portion 8961 which protrudes in the longitudinal direction of lower base member 8970 from the back side end portion of the lower base member 8970 in the longitudinal direction and concave portion 8962 formed in upper base member 8960 And a recessed groove 8973 recessed along the longitudinal direction of the lower base member 8970 on the inner bottom surface formed in a box shape.

  The concave groove 8973 is a portion for guiding the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 of the displacement unit 8900 described later, and the roller displacement member 8933 of the displacement unit 8900 described later is inserted into the concave groove 8973 to slide the displacement of the displacement unit 8900 The direction is defined.

  Therefore, in the displacement unit 8900 to be described later, a part of the displacement unit 8900 is the outer side of the base unit 8950 through the space formed by the concave portion 8962 formed in each of the upper base member 8960 and the lower base member 8970. It will be in the state where it was arranged.

  The displacement unit 8900 is disposed inside the base unit 8950 and slides in the left and right direction. The slide unit 8930 is disposed on the slide unit 8930 and the rotation unit 8940 is rotatable with respect to the slide unit 8930. , Mainly.

  The slide unit 8930 is provided on a pair of main body members 8931 which are formed to be vertically divided into two, and the rotation shaft of a drive motor 8963 provided on the main body member 8931 and provided on the base unit 8950 A rack 8932 meshing with the transmission gear 8964, and a roller member 8933 rotatably disposed on the main body member 8931 with a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protruding outward of the main body portion; And a holding member 8934 disposed on the opposite side of the main body member 8931 with the roller member 8933 interposed therebetween.

  The pair of main body members 8931 are disposed symmetrically in the vertical direction, and a concave portion 8931a recessed from an opposing surface on the front side, a shaft hole 8931b drilled in the concave portion 8931a, and a back surface in the opposite direction And a mounting portion 8931 c which is recessed along the sliding direction of the unit 8930.

  The recess 8931a is a recess for forming a space for arranging a rotation unit 8940 described later when the pair of main body members 8931 is combined, and has an inner edge shape along the maximum rotation range of the rotation unit 8940. Ru.

  The shaft hole 8931 b is a circular hole into which a shaft portion 8945 for pivotally supporting the rotation unit 8940 is inserted, and is drilled in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). Thus, in the state where the shaft portion 8945 is inserted into the rotation unit 8940, the rotation unit 8940 is rotated to the main body member 8931 by inserting both end portions of the shaft portion 8945 into the respective shaft holes 8931b of the pair of main body members 8931. It can be arranged as possible.

  The mounting portion 8931 c is a portion where the rack 8932 or the holding member 8934 is disposed, and the rack 8932 is disposed on the upper main body member 8931 of the pair of main body members 8931 and is formed in a pair A holding member 8934 is disposed on the lower main body member 8931 of the main body member 8931.

  The rack 8932 is a portion displaced by the drive transmitted from the drive motor 8963 as described above, and has a gear tooth surface on the upper surface side and the teeth are meshed with the transmission gear 8964. Thus, the rack 8932 can be displaced by the drive transmitted from the drive motor 8963. Further, the rack 8932 is fastened to the main body member 8931, and the entire slide unit can be slide-displaced by displacing the rack 8932.

  The holding member 8934 is disposed on the main body member 8931 in a state in which the annular roller member 8933 is axially supported between the holding member 8934 and the main body member 8931 facing each other. Further, the roller member 8933 is disposed in a state where a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the main body member 8931 in a front view. The maximum projection distance of the roller member 8933 in the radial direction from the main body member 8931 is set larger than the downward recess dimension of the recessed groove 8973 of the lower base member 8970. Thus, when the roller member 8933 is inserted into the recessed groove 8973, the recessed bottom surface of the recessed groove 8973 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the roller member 8933. As a result, by rotating the roller member 8933 when the slide unit 8930 is slidingly displaced, the resistance when slidingly moving the slide unit 8930 can be reduced.

  The rotation unit 8940 has a display portion 8941 formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a shaft support portion 8942 when projected from the back side of the display surface, and a cylindrical shaft member 8943 inserted into the shaft support portion 8942. Prepare mainly.

  In the display portion 8941, a picture of a pattern or a character is drawn on one surface of the front side (arrow F direction side), and the pattern or the character can be viewed by the player.

  The pivoted support portion 8942 is a portion supported by the slide unit 8930 described above, and the protruding tip is disposed in the space formed by the pair of concave portions 8931 a of the slide unit 8930. Further, the supported portion 8942 has a through hole 8942a penetrating in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction) at the projecting tip end. The shaft member 8943 is inserted into the through hole 8942a, and the shaft member 8943 protruding from the through hole 8942a is inserted into the shaft hole 8931b formed in the recess 8931a. Thereby, the rotation unit 8940 is made rotatable with respect to the slide unit 8930.

  Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the supported portion 8942 and the recess 8931a. By the biasing force of the torsion spring, the rotation unit 8940 maintains a posture in which the pattern or character drawn on the display unit 8941 is directed to the front side when no external force is applied.

  Subsequently, displacements of the slide unit 8930 and the rotation unit 8940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400, and FIG. 72 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). 73 (a) and 73 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 8400. FIG. FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400, and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 taken along line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 8400. FIG.

  72 and 73 show the state where the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 74 and 75 show the state where the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the second position. Further, FIG. 73 (a) shows the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 72 (b) slid to the left, and FIG. 73 (b) shows the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 72 (b) on the right. The slide movement is illustrated. Furthermore, FIG. 75 (a) shows the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 74 (b) slid to the left, and FIG. 75 (b) shows the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 74 (b) on the right. The slide movement is illustrated.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, a case where the slide unit 8930 is displaced in a state where the decorative member 8450 is disposed at the first position will be described. When the decoration member 8450 is disposed at the third position, it is the same as the state disposed at the first position, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the decorative member 8450 is placed in the first position, the end on one side of the displacement member 5430 is disposed above the rotation unit 8940. . Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the slide unit 8930 is disposed at a substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the internal space of the base unit 8950, both left and right directions of the slide unit 8930 Thus, a space is formed, and the slide unit 8930 can be displaced in the left and right direction by the space.

  The width dimension L2 (see FIG. 74 (b)) of the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 8962 of the base unit 8950 (see FIG. 74B) is the maximum distance dimension L3 (slidable to the left and right of the slide unit 8930). It is set to approximately twice that of FIG. 74 (b)). Thus, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the axially supported portion 8942 of the rotation unit 8940 can be made to abut on the inner edge of the recessed portion 8962. As a result, after the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 is stopped, the display unit 8941 of the rotation unit 8940 can be suppressed from being rotated in the slide direction of the slide unit 8930 by the completion force by the stop, and the display surface of the display unit 8941 Can be oriented toward the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, a case where the slide unit 8930 is displaced in a state where the decorative member 8450 is disposed at the second position will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, when the decorative member 8450 is placed in the second position, the end on one side of the displacement member 5430 is the upper and lower ends of the pivoted portion 8942 of the rotation unit 8940. It is disposed at substantially the same position as the direction height. In addition, the distance dimension L1 (see FIG. 74B) between the end portions on one side of the pair of displacement members 5430 is the width dimension in the left-right direction of the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 8962 of the base unit 8950 It is smaller than L2 (see FIG. 74 (b)). Furthermore, the end of one side of the pair of displacement members 5430 is disposed inside the left and right ends of the opening formed by the pair of recessed and recessed portions 8962.

  Further, the maximum slidable distance L3 (see FIG. 74 (b)) to which the slide unit 8930 can slide in the left and right direction is set larger than the facing distance L4 in the left and right direction of the pair of displacement members 5430 and the rotation unit 8940. . Thus, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the rotation unit 8940 can be brought into contact with the one end of the displacement member 5430.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in both the left and right directions, the supported portion 8942 of the rotation unit 8940 is at one end of the displacement member 5430. In contact, the rotation unit 8940 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 8942a. In this case, in the rotation unit 8940, the display unit 8941 is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the slide direction of the slide unit 8930.

  In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the one side ends of the displacement member 5430 is reduced as the decoration member 8450 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, the rotation angle of the rotation unit 8940 due to the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 can be changed by the arrangement of the decoration member 8450.

  Therefore, in the store where the pachinko machine 10 is arranged, when the player who plays the pachinko machine arranged next to the pachinko machine 10 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 10 obliquely from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the player is displayed This makes it difficult to visually recognize the pattern or character displayed in the portion 8941. As a result, it can be suppressed that the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 10 is hindered. In this case, it is preferable that the display portion 8941 be provided with a liquid crystal device capable of changing a displayed pattern or a character. According to this, by switching between the display at the time of slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 and the display at the time of return of the displacement of the slide unit 8930, display on the display unit 8941 for the player who plays the adjacent pachinko machine It is possible to suppress that a pattern or a character to be displayed is visually recognized when the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is returned. As a result, it can be suppressed that the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 10 is hindered.

  Further, the change of the rotation angle of the rotation unit 8940 can be performed by the displacement member 5430 for displacing the decoration member 8450. Therefore, the displacing member 5430 can be used both for displacing the decorative member 8450 and for restraining the rotation of the rotation unit 8940. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

  Note that in the display portion 8941, not a liquid crystal device but a lenticular or the like which can change a display mode by changing a viewing angle may be provided. In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is slide-displaced, the display for causing the player to visually recognize and the display for the player who plays the pachinko machine next to the pachinko machine 10 to view the display portion 8941 are different modes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the normal display of the pachinko machine 10 other than the player who plays the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it can be suppressed that the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 10 is hindered. In addition to a lenticular, a liquid crystal device whose display mode can be changed by changing a viewing angle like a lenticular may be provided in the display portion 8941. In this case, since the image displayed on the display unit 8941 can be changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who plays the adjacent pachinko machine to visually recognize the pattern or character displayed on the display unit 8941.

  Furthermore, when the decoration member 8450 is arranged at the second position, the direction connecting the end of one side of the displacement member 5430 and the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 is the sliding direction (arrow L-R) direction of the slide unit 8930 It is considered parallel. Thus, when the slide unit 8930 slides and the main body member 8931 abuts on the one side end of the displacement member 5430, the rotational displacement of the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the rotation unit 8940, the end of the display portion 8941 displaced to the back side is the same position (horizontal direction (position overlapping in the arrow L-R direction) with the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the displacement member 5430 The rotation angle is set to). Therefore, when the rotation unit 8940 is rotated in contact with the displacement member 5430 by the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930, if the slide unit 8930 is slid in the opposite direction, the display unit 8941 is displaced to the back side. The end in the left-right direction abuts on the one side end of the displacement member 5430 disposed on the opposite side in the left-right direction, the displacement member 5430 and the display portion 8941 mesh with each other, and the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is restricted. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation unit 8940 sets the rotation angle at the front-rear direction position where the end of the display portion 8941 displaced to the back side includes the end of the displacement member 5430 in the forward direction (arrow F direction). Be done. Thereby, when the displacement of slide unit 8930 is repeated and the end in the left-right direction of display unit 8941 abuts the end on one side of displacement member 5430, the display surface of display unit 8941 is directed to the front side. Forces can be applied when impacted in a direction. As a result, engagement between the displacement member 5430 and the display portion 8941 can be suppressed, and the displacement of the slide unit 8930 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the vertical displacement unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430. However, in the ninth embodiment, the restriction of the rotation of the rotation unit 9840 is linearly displaced. The case of performing will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the slide unit 9930. FIG. FIG. 79 is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG.

  In the ninth embodiment, with the slide unit 9930 disposed at the lowermost position (arrow D direction) as the first position, the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the uppermost position (arrow U direction) as the second position. Explain as. Further, in FIG. 79, the base unit 9950 disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) in the front view and the main body portion 9931 disposed on the right side in the front view are viewed transparently and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the vertical displacement unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base unit 9950 disposed at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a pair of the base units 9950. It mainly includes a displacement member 9430 and a slide unit 9930 disposed between the opposite sides, and a rotation unit 9940 connected to the slide unit 9930.

  The pair of base units 9950 are formed in a box shape whose one surface is opened, and disposed in a state in which the open surfaces face each other, and a displacement member 9430, a slide unit 9930 and a rotation unit 9940 described later It is arranged. The base unit 9950 also has two first projections 9951 projecting in the opposite direction on the inner opposing surface, two second projections 9952 whose projection distance is shorter than the first projections 9951, and a first projection. An erected portion 9953 erected on both sides in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of 9951 and an insertion hole 9956 for inserting the transmission gear 9955 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 9954 are mainly provided.

  The first protrusion 9951 is inserted into a sliding groove 9430 a of a displacement member 9430 described later, and can guide the displacement member 9430 when the displacement member 9430 is displaced. Further, in the displacement member 9430 into which the first protrusion 9951 is inserted, both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are disposed between the facing portions of the standing portions 9953 of the pair of base units 9950 Is disposed between the pair of base units 9950 facing each other in a state in which the displacement of the base unit 9950 is restricted.

  Since the standing portions 9953 are disposed on both sides in the front-rear direction of the first protrusion 9951, it is possible to suppress the displacement member 9430 from tilting in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. Further, the erected portion 9953 extends in the sliding direction (vertical direction) of the displacement member 9430, and can restrict the displacement of the displacement member 9430 in the left-right direction even when the displacement member 9430 slides.

  The second protrusion 9952 is inserted into a slide groove 9931 c of a slide unit 9930 described later, and can guide the slide unit 9930 when the slide unit 9930 is slide-displaced.

  The displacement member 9430 is formed in a plate shape having a vertically-long rectangular shape in a side view, a second tooth surface 9430b of the tooth surface of the gear on one surface on the front side, and a first tooth surface 9430c of the tooth surface on the gear on the rear surface. The sliding groove 9430a is a long hole penetrating in the left-right direction and long in the vertical direction, and a projecting portion 9430d protruding upward from one surface of the upper side.

  The sliding grooves 9430a are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the first projections 9951 described above are disposed in the respective sliding grooves 9430a. Further, the opening dimension in the vertical direction of the sliding groove 9430 a is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the displacement distance of the displacement member 9430.

  The first tooth surface 9430 c is extended in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The first tooth surface 9430 c is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 9955 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 9954, and transmits the drive of the drive motor 9954 to the first tooth surface 9430 c via the transmission gear 9955. can do. Thus, the displacement member 9430 is displaced in the vertical direction by the rotation of the drive motor 9954.

  The second tooth surface 9430 b is meshed with the slide transmission gear 9980 and the rotation transmission gear 9935 of the slide unit 9930, and the displacement member 9430 is displaced by the drive motor 9954 to rotate the slide transmission gear 9980 and the rotation. Both side transmission gears 9935 are rotated. As a result, by sliding the displacement member 9430, the slide unit 9930 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction, and the rotation unit 9940 can be rotationally displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the slide unit 9930 and the rotation unit 9940 will be described later.

  The projecting portion 9430 d is a projection inserted into the inserted portion 9941 a recessed in the rotation unit 9940, and disposed in a state of being inserted into the inserted portion 9941 a when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position. Be done.

  The slide unit 9930 includes a pair of main body portions 9931, a rotation side transmission gear 9935 disposed between the main body portions facing each other, an intervening gear 9936 meshing with the rotation side transmission gear 9935, and the intervening gears A slide gear 9937 meshing with 9936 and a rack 9938 meshing with the slide side transmission gear 9980 are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 9931 is disposed in a pair in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the pair is connected in a state where a predetermined space is provided between the facing portions. Further, a plurality of projections are formed on the inner side in the opposing direction of the pair of main body portions 9931, and the rotation-side transmission gear 9935, an intervening gear 9936, an intervening gear 993 and a sliding gear 9937 are formed on the plurality of projections. Supported. Furthermore, the main body portion 9931 is provided with a sliding groove 9931 c which is opened in the lateral direction and long in the vertical direction. The slide groove 9931 c is guided by the slide unit 9930 as the second protrusion 9952 of the base unit 9950 is inserted as described above.

  The gear trains 9935 to 9937 are gear trains for transmitting the drive to the rotation unit 9940 when the displacement member 9430 described above is displaced, and the rotation side transmission gear 9935 is engaged with the second tooth surface 9430 b of the displacement member 9430. The sliding gear 9937 meshes with the rotation unit 9940.

  In addition, the sliding gear 9937 has a small diameter tooth portion 9937a of a tooth surface formed in a small diameter at a part, and a sliding surface 9937b in which the formation of a tooth surface is partially removed adjacent to the small diameter tooth portion 9937a in the circumferential direction. Prepare. The detailed description of the small diameter tooth portion 9937a and the sliding gear 9937 will be described later.

  The rack 9938 has a tooth surface 9938 a meshing with the slide side transmission gear 9980 on one surface on the rear side, and is fastened and fixed to the main body 9931. In addition, the tooth surface 9938 a is disposed at a position projecting from the facing of the main body portion 9931. Accordingly, when the displacement member 9430 is displaced, the main body portion 9931 can be prevented from contacting the displacement member 9430.

  The rotation unit 9940 is formed in a curved shape in a side view, and is provided with a display portion 9941 having an inner peripheral surface facing the base unit 9950, and an axially supported portion projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the display portion 9941 toward the base unit 9950 And 9942 mainly.

  In the display portion 9941, a pattern or a character is drawn on the outer peripheral side, and an inserted portion 9941 a into which the protruding portion 9430 d of the displacement member 9430 is inserted is recessed on the inner peripheral side. As described above, when the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the first position, the protrusion 9430 d is inserted into the inserted portion 9941 a, whereby the rotation of the rotation unit 9940 is restricted.

  The shaft support portion 9942 includes a through hole 9942a penetrating in the left-right direction on the protruding tip side, and a curved tooth surface 9942b of a tooth surface of a curved gear centering on the center of the through hole 9942a at the protruding tip portion.

  The through holes 9942 a are disposed in the slide unit 9930 in a state in which the projections that project in the opposing direction of the pair of main body portions 9931 are inserted. The rotation unit 9940 is coupled to the slide unit 9930 in a rotatable state with respect to the slide unit 9930 by the through holes 9942 a being pivotally supported by the protrusions of the main body portion 9931.

  The curved tooth surface 9942 b is a portion engaged with the slide gear 9937, and the rotation unit 9940 is rotated relative to the slide unit 9930 by the rotation of the slide gear 9937. In addition, the curved tooth surface 9942b is provided with a large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of a tooth surface that is partially formed to have a large diameter.

  When the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the first position, the large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 has its tip end positioned at the end on the circumferential side opposite to the small diameter tooth portion 9937a of the sliding surface 9937b. Thereby, in the initial stage of rotation of sliding gear 9937, curved tooth surface 9942b and sliding gear 9937 can not be engaged with each other, and the start timing of slide unit 9930 and the start timing of rotation unit 9940 can be obtained. It can be shifted.

  Subsequently, displacement of the vertical displacement unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. 80 and 81 are side views of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG. FIGS. 79 to 81 sequentially show transition states in which the slide unit 9930 is displaced from the first position to the second position. In FIG. 79, the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the first position, and in FIG. 81, the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the second position. In FIG. 80, the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the first position. Are slightly displaced, respectively. In FIGS. 80 and 81, the base unit 9950 disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) in the front view and the main body portion 9931 disposed on the right side in the front view are illustrated as being transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 79, when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position, the projecting portion 9430 d of the displacement member 9430 is inserted into the inserted portion 9941 a, and the displacement member 9430 is in the lower direction (arrow D By displacing in the direction, the restriction between the displacement member 9430 and the rotation unit 9940 is released.

  Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the drive of the drive motor 9954 rotationally displaces the slide side transmission gear 9980 and the rotation unit 9940, which causes the displacement of the slide unit 9930 via the displacement member 9430. Is transmitted to the sliding gear 9937. Therefore, if the slide displacement of the displacement member 9430 and the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 9940 are performed at the same timing, the rotation unit 9940 rotates before the projecting portion 9430 d comes out of the inserted portion 9941 a, and from the inserted portion 9941 a There is a problem that the protrusion 9430d can not come out.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved tooth surface 9942b is provided with the large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of the tooth surface formed in a large diameter in a part, and in the state of being disposed at the first position, the tip slides The small diameter tooth 9937a of the surface 9937b is located at the end opposite to the connection side and the circumferential direction, so as shown in FIG. 80, in the initial stage of displacement of the displacement member 9430, the sliding unit of the sliding gear 9937 By sliding the large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of 9940, the engagement with the rotation unit 9940 and the sliding gear 9937 can be released. Therefore, when the displacement member 9430 is displaced, the displacement member 9430 can be displaced earlier than the rotation unit 9940. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 9430 d from coming off the inserted portion 9941 a.

  Further, since the small diameter tooth portion 9937a is formed on the sliding gear 9937 and the large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 is formed on the curved tooth surface 9942b, after sliding the sliding surface 9937b, the sliding gear 9937 and It is possible to prevent the curved tooth surface 9942b from meshing and becoming immobile or dislocating the meshing.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the second position, the display unit 9941 of the rotation unit 9940 is the front as the displacement member 9430 displaces the slide unit 9930 to the second position. It can be turned to the side.

  In the ninth embodiment, the vertical displacement unit 9400 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13 below the opening of the center frame 600, and the slide unit 9930 is disposed at the first position, The player can visually recognize the entire area of the display portion 9941 by visually recognizing the display portion 9941 from the front of the center frame 600 and obliquely upward. On the other hand, when the slide unit 9930 is displaced to the second position, the display portion 9941 is displaced to the inside of the center frame 600, and the display surface of the display portion 9941 is inverted. This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the display unit 9941 disposed inside the center frame 600. That is, in the ninth embodiment, by synchronizing the slide unit 9930 and the rotation unit 9940, the display unit 9941 can be disposed at a position easily visible to the player.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 10400 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 83. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where one end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted into the recess 5514 recessed in the rotation unit 5500 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, along with the displacement of the decorative member 10450 The protrusion 10459 a that rotates is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 10400 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 82 (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. In FIG. 82 (a), the front cover 5460 is seen as transparent and illustrated, and in FIG. 82 (b), the back base 5453 of the decorative member 10450 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the vertical displacement unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment has a front base 10410 formed in a box shape, and a front cover 5460 superimposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. A drive motor 441 disposed on the back side of the front base 10410, and a displacement member axially supported between the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. 10430 and a decoration member 10450 which is connected to one side of the displacement member 10430 and is displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) with the rotation of the displacement member 10430, and is inserted into the decoration member 10450 and A guide rod P1 disposed between the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 is mainly provided.

  The front base 10410 includes a first piece 10410X extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) and a first piece 10410X disposed in a pair in the left-right direction from a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 10410X. And a second piece 5410Y that bulges outward in the opposing direction of the

  The first piece 10410 X has an upper concave portion 413 recessed on the upper end side in a sectional arc, a lower concave groove 414 having a lower end recessed on the sectional arc, and the far side from the rotation unit 10500 (arrow An upright portion 5412 erected on the front cover 5460 side (arrow F direction side) along the edge of the L direction), and a rack member 10444 disposed on the opposite surface side facing the pair of first pieces 10410 X And.

  The rack member 10444 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the extending direction of the first piece 10410X in a front view, and the tooth surface 1044a of the gear is engraved on the opposing surface on the side where the pair of first pieces 10410X are opposed. Tooth flank 10444a is arranged in the 1st piece 10410X (front base 10410) in the state where it projected from the side of the opposite side of a pair of 1st piece 10410X.

  The decorative member 10450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes a front base 10452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 10452, and a back surface of the front base 10452 And a rotation unit 10500 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front base 10452, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) gears at both ends in the longitudinal direction. And 10454 to 10456.

  The rotation unit 10500 has an upper surface base 10510 which forms the upper side surface of the rotation unit 10500, an irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the upper surface base 10510, and is arranged below the irradiation unit 530. , A reflecting plate 560 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) disposed in front of the reflecting plate 560, and an upper surface It is mainly provided with the rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and the lower surface base 10520 forming the lower side surface of the rotation unit 10500. .

  In addition, the rotation unit 10500 is formed in a rectangular shape, one of which is long in front view, and is provided at both longitudinal ends of the rotation unit 10500 of the upper surface base 10510, the intermediate member 10540 and the lower surface base 10520 that constitute the outer surface. Side walls 10515 are formed in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.

  As in the first embodiment, the rotation unit 10500 is configured as a versa writer that produces effects by the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, and the rotation transmission unit 570 is similar to the first embodiment. The rotation of the rear base 571 is performed about the center of the gear 571a1.

  The center of gravity of the rotation unit 10500 is set on the rotation axis O, and when the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 10500 is horizontal, the rotation unit 10500 rotates around the rotation axis O by its own weight. Being suppressed.

  Similar to the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 10452 is formed of a plate having a rectangular shape in a front view and a rectangular shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower end portions are bent back. The front base 10542 has a sliding groove 5452 j formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450 and a second sliding opened in a circular arc centering on a straight line extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) The groove 10452 m is mainly provided.

  In the second sliding groove 10452m, a protrusion 10459a of a regulating member 10459 arranged on a gear 10456 described later inside is inserted. Further, in the second sliding groove 10452m, the axis of the arc in front view is set coaxially with the rotation axis of the gear 10456 described later. Thereby, when the gear 10456 is rotated, the protrusion 10459a slides inside the second sliding groove 10452m. Further, the second sliding groove 10452m is formed at a position where a part of the inner edge in the radial direction in front view is in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500 disposed at the initial position. Thus, the protrusion 10459a sliding on the inside of the second sliding groove 10452m can be disposed in contact with the side wall 10515. The second sliding groove 10452m is set such that the width dimension in the vertical direction is larger than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the side wall 10515, and the protrusion 10459a is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515; It is possible to switch between the state by moving it outward in the direction. As a result, when the decorative member 10450 is displaced in the vertical direction, the protrusion 10459a can be switched between the state in contact with the side wall 10515 and the state in which the protrusion 10459a is located outside the side wall 10515 in the vertical direction. Can be switched between regulating and non-regulating states.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the protrusion 10459a in a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the first to third positions will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the third position, and FIG. 83 (b) is a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the third position. FIG. 18 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. FIG. 83 (c) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the second position, and FIG. 83 (d) is a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the second position. FIG. 18 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. FIG. 83 (e) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. 83 (f) is a state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the first position. FIG. 18 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b), when the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the third position, the projection 10459a of the regulating member 10459 is above the rotating unit 10500 disposed at the initial position. (Arrow U direction) is arranged. In this case, the protrusion 10459a is disposed outside the rotation area RY2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) of the rotation unit 10500. Thereby, the rotation unit 10500 is allowed to rotate in the state where the decoration member 10450 is disposed at the third position. Therefore, when the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the third position, the player can visually recognize the effect by the rotation of the rotation unit 10500.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (c) and 83 (d), in the state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the second position, the protrusion 10459a of the regulating member 10459 is disposed at the initial position. It is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515. In this case, the protrusion 10459a is disposed inside the rotation area RY2 of the rotation unit 10500. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is restricted in the state where the decoration member 10450 is disposed at the second position.

  In this case, the side wall 10515 is formed to be flat while the projection 10459a is rotationally displaced, so a gap is formed between the side wall 10515 and the side wall 10515 as the projection 10459a is rotated. Accordingly, when the rotation unit 10500 is stopped at a position slightly deviated from the initial position, the sidewall 10515 can be suppressed from being disposed on the displacement trajectory of the protrusion 10459a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the projection 10459a from being restricted by colliding with the rotation unit 10500 while the projection 10459a is displaced.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (e) and 83 (f), in the state where the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the first position, the projection 10459a of the regulating member 10459 is disposed at the initial position. It is disposed below (in the direction of the arrow D). In this case, the protrusion 10459a is disposed outside the rotation area RY2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) of the rotation unit 10500. Thereby, the rotation unit 10500 is allowed to rotate in the state where the decoration member 10450 is disposed at the first position. Therefore, when the decorative member 10450 is disposed at the first position, the player can visually recognize the effect by the rotation of the rotation unit 10500.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 11400 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. In the tenth embodiment, although the case where the protrusion 10459a interlocks with the displacement of the decorative member 10450 has been described, in the tenth embodiment, the case where interlocking with the displacement of the protrusion 10459a is not performed is formed. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 11400 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 according to the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 84, the back base 453 is not shown. The rear base 453 is shown transparently.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the vertical displacement unit 11400 in the eleventh embodiment has a front base 10410 formed in a box shape, and a front cover 5460 superimposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. And a displacement member rotatably supported by a drive motor 441 disposed on the rear side of the front base 10410 and opposed to the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. 10430 and a decoration member 11450 which is connected to one side of the displacement member 10430 and is displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) with the rotation of the displacement member 10430, and is inserted into the decoration member 11450 and A guide rod P1 disposed between the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 is mainly provided.

  The decorative member 11450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes a front base 11452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 11452, and a back surface of the front base 11452 A rear base 453 (not shown) to be covered, a rotation unit 10500 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front base 11452, and a plurality of both ends in the longitudinal direction (three on the left in the rear view in this embodiment) , 4) gears 10454, 10455, 11455 and 11456 on the right side in the rear view.

  Similar to the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 11452 is formed of a plate having a rectangular shape in a front view and a rectangular shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower end portions are bent back. Further, the front base 11542 is opened in a circular arc centering on a sliding groove 5452 j formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the decoration member 11450 and a straight line extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) A sliding groove 10452m and a recessed portion 11452n recessed in an arc shape connected to the second sliding groove 10452m are mainly provided.

  The recessed portion 11452 n is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the second sliding groove 10452 m in rear view, and both ends in the circumferential direction are connected to the second sliding groove 10452 m. Further, the recessed distance of the recessed portion 11452 n to the front side is set to be larger than the projection length of the protrusion 10459 a inserted into the second sliding groove 10452 m. Thus, the protrusion 10459a can be rotated to a position beyond the circumferential end of the second sliding groove 10452m.

  The gear 11455 is disposed only in the gear train disposed on the right in the rear view, and is in a state of meshing with the gear 10455 and the gear 11456. Thus, the rotation direction of the gear 11456 on the right side in the rear view described later can be clockwise in the rear view.

  The gear 11456 incorporates a one-way clutch 11456a (commercially available one-way clutch) that transmits only the power of rotation in one direction, and is disposed outside the one-way clutch 11456a and the inner ring 11456b disposed inside the one-way clutch 11456a. And an outer ring 11456c in which tooth flanks of the gear are engraved on the outer peripheral surface. Thus, gear 11456 can transmit power to inner ring 11456b when gear 10455 is rotated in one direction, and no power is transmitted to inner ring 11456b when gear 11455 is rotated in the other direction. It is assumed. A detailed description of the rotation of the gear 11457 will be described later.

  A restricting member 10459 is disposed on the inner ring 11456b. Thus, the protrusion 10459a of the restriction member 11459 is displaced only when power is transmitted to the inner ring 11456b by the one-way clutch 11456a. That is, the protrusion 10459a is rotated only in one direction. Accordingly, the protrusion 10459a can be stopped at an arbitrary position by repeatedly displacing the decorative member 11450 in the vertical direction (the arrow L-R direction).

  In the present embodiment, the one-way clutch 11456a incorporated in the gears 11456 disposed at the two left and right places of the decorative member 11450 is only one of the two gears 11456 when the decorative member 11450 is displaced in one direction. Can transmit power to the inner ring 11456b (for example, when the decoration member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the first position, the inner ring of the gear 11456 in the rear view right side (arrow L direction side) is rotated) When the member 11450 is displaced in the other direction, only the other of the two gears 11456 can transmit power to the inner ring 11456b (for example, when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the first position to the third position, The inner ring of the gear 11456 on the left side in the rear view (arrow R direction side) is rotated).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the inner ring 11456b (protrusion 10459a) of the gear 11456 disposed on the left side in the rear view (arrow R direction side) is set counterclockwise in the rear view, and the right side in the rear view (arrow L The rotation direction of the inner ring 11456b (protrusion 10459a) of the gear 11456 disposed on the direction side) is set clockwise in the rear view. Thereby, when the gear 11456 is rotated and the protrusion 10459a is disposed inside the second sliding groove 10452m, the load of the regulating member 10459 can be made to act in the direction of transmitting the power of the one-way clutch 11456a. As a result, when the protrusion 10459a is disposed inside the second sliding groove 11452m, it is possible to prevent the one-way clutch 11456a from idling and shifting of the position of the protrusion 10459a.

  When the projection 10459a slides on the inside of the recessed portion 11452n located on the opposite side of the second sliding groove 10452m and the axis of curvature, the load of the regulating member 10459 causes the one-way clutch 11456a to idle. When the projection 10459a slides on the recessed portion 11452n, the other member (for example, the rotation unit 10500) collides compared to the case where the projection 10459a slides on the second sliding groove 10452m. Since the possibility of doing so is reduced, it is possible to prevent the one-way clutch from slipping and shifting the position of the protrusion 10459a.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the first position or from the first position to the third position, the gear 10454 rotates such that the outer ring 11456 c of the gear 11456 rotates approximately 180 degrees, The gear ratios of 10455, 10456, and 11456 are set. Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the rotation angles of the gears 11456 disposed at two places.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 85 and 86, when the decoration member 11450 is disposed from the third position to the first position, and the decoration member 11450 disposed at the first position is displaced from the first position to the third position The projections 10459a of the lens will be described. In the following description, when the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the third position and is set to the initial position before displacement, the protrusion 11459a is on the lower side (the arrow D direction side) of the second sliding groove 11452m. It will be described from the state where it is disposed at the end.

  FIG. 85 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the third position, and FIG. 85 (b) is a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the second position. FIG. 85C is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400, and FIG. 85C is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the first position. 86 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. 86 (b) is a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the second position. FIG. 86 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400, and FIG. 86 (c) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the third position.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the second position, only on the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 disposed on the right in the rear view Power is transmitted, and the restriction member 10459 (protrusion 10459a) is rotated in the direction of the arrow X1 (see FIG. 85 (b)).

  In this case, the protrusion 10459a is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, since the projections 10459a are disposed in the rotation area R1 of the rotation unit 10500, the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is restricted.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the back surface is the same as the displacement from the third position to the second position. The power is transmitted only to the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 disposed on the right side of the view, and the regulating member 10459 (protrusion 10459a) is rotated in the direction of the arrow X2 (see FIG. 85C). Accordingly, the protrusion 10459a is disposed on the outer side in the vertical direction of the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500 and is disposed on the outer side of the rotation region R1 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is permitted.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 disposed on the left in the rear view The power is transmitted only to the control member 10459, and the restriction member 10459 (the protrusion 10459a) is rotated in the direction of the arrow Y1 (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  In this case, the protrusion 10459a is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, since the projections 10459a are disposed in the rotation area R1 of the rotation unit 10500, the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is restricted.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the back surface is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position. The power is transmitted only to the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 disposed on the left side of the view, and the regulating member 10459 (protrusion 10459a) is rotated in the direction of the arrow Y2 (see FIG. 86C). Accordingly, the protrusion 10459a is disposed on the outer side in the vertical direction of the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500 and is disposed on the outer side of the rotation region R1 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is permitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the decorative member 11450 is not limited to the above-described order, and for example, from the state where the decorative member 11450 is disposed at the third position shown in FIG. By displacing the decorative member 11450 in the order of the second position, the protrusion 10459a of the gear 11456 disposed on the left in rear view is disposed in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500 disposed at the initial position. Further, from this state, when the decoration member 11450 is further displaced in the order of the third position and the second position, the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 can be allowed at the second position. As a result, the rotation unit 10500 can be rotated to increase the area to be rendered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the vertical displacement unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment described the case where the locus of displacement of the projections 10459a of the regulating members 10459 arranged at the two left and right sides is symmetrical on the left and right, but in the twelfth embodiment, it is The displacement regulation of the projection 10459a of the regulation member 10459 to be disposed is set to be different at the left and right. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 87, the gear 10456 in which the regulating member 10459 is disposed is illustrated by a chain line. Further, a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the rotation center of the gear 10456 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of an imaginary line KS4. Further, in FIG. 87, a state in which the decoration member 12450 is disposed at the third position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the second sliding grooves 12452m opened in the front base 12452 of the vertical displacement unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment are formed at different heights on the left and right. More specifically, the second sliding groove 12452m on the left in front view has an angle θ1 (see FIG. 87) at which the straight line connecting the upper end and the rotation center of the gear 10456 intersects the imaginary line KS4. It is set smaller than an angle θ2 at which the imaginary line KS4 intersects a straight line connecting the upper end of the second sliding groove 12452m and the rotation center of the gear 10456.

  Further, in the state where the decorative member 12450 is disposed at the third position, the protrusions 10459a of the regulating member 10459 are respectively disposed inside the upper side end of the second sliding groove 12452m. Therefore, when the decorative member 12450 is displaced from the third position to the second position and the gear 10456 is rotated, the protrusion 10459a of the regulating member 10459 on the right side in front view is disposed at the initial position prior to the protrusion 10459a on the left side. It is disposed inside the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500.

  Here, when the rotation unit 10500 is stopped at the initial position after being rotated, the rotation operation is performed after the projection formed on the gear 456 (see FIG. 26) described above is disposed between the detection sensors. There was a tendency for the position to shift in the direction of rotation and stop. Therefore, after rotating the rotation unit 10500, when the rotation unit 10500 is dislocated to a position overlapping with the second sliding groove 12452m in a front view and stopped, as described in the tenth embodiment, the protrusion 10459a is When simultaneously displaced, one protrusion 10459a may collide with the outer surface of the rotation unit 10500, and the movement of the protrusion 10459a may be restricted.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, since one protrusion 10459a leads, the protrusion 10459a leads when the rotational direction of the rotation unit 10500 at the first and third positions is displaced to the second position. The stop position of the rotation unit 10500 is shifted by setting the rotation direction in the opposite direction to the side (in the present embodiment, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in front view in the third position, and the rotation in front direction clockwise in the first position). In this case, the position of the rotation unit 10500 can be returned to the initial position by bringing the leading side protrusion 10459a into contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the projection 10459a on the trailing side collides with the outer surface of the rotation unit 10500.

  Subsequently, the vertical displacement unit 13400 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation of the rotation unit 13500 is restricted by the projecting member 13495 which protrudes from the front base 13452 Be done. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIGS. 88A and 88B are front views of the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 taken along line LXXXIXa-LXXXIXa of FIG. 88 (b), and H02 (b) is a vertical movement unit 13400 along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the vertical displacement unit 13400 in the thirteenth embodiment has a front base 5410 formed in a box shape, and a front surface superimposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. A cover 5460, a drive motor 441 disposed on the back side of the front base 5410, and a front base 5410 and a front cover 5460 are supported so as to be axially supported and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. A displacement member 13430 and a decoration member 13450 connected to one side of the displacement member 13430 and displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) along with the rotation of the displacement member 13430 and inserted into the decoration member 13450 And a guide rod P1 disposed between the facing of the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460.

  The decorative member 13450 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and has a front base 13452 constituting a longitudinal central portion, sliding portions 451 connected to both lateral ends of the front base 13452, and a back surface of the front base 13452 Of the front base 13452, a projecting member 13495 disposed between the front base 13452 and the back base 13453, a cylindrical shaft member 13496 for pivotally supporting the projecting member 13495, and a front base 13452 And a rotation unit 13500 rotatably disposed on the front side.

  Like the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 13452 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long rectangular shape, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower end portions are bent back. The front base 13452 is provided with a second opening 13452 p that opens in a rectangular shape in a front view sideways, and the rotation unit 13500 is disposed rotatably in a substantially middle position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450.

  The second opening 13452 p is an opening through which a projecting member 13495 described later is inserted, and is approximately twice as large as the axial support direction (arrow L-R direction) of the projecting member 13495 than the front view shape of the projecting member 13495 Formed in the size of. In the second opening 13452p, a wall portion 13452p1 protruding toward the back surface base 13453 is formed at an end in the left-right direction, and the first magnet 13452p2 having magnetism is disposed at both ends in the up-down direction.

  In the wall portion 13452p1, a shaft member 13496 for supporting a projecting member 13495 described later is inserted. Thus, the projecting member 13495 is inserted into the second opening 13452 p and can be vertically rotated with respect to the front base 13452.

  The projecting member 13495 is a member that regulates the rotation of the rotation unit 13500 by inserting the end on one side into a recess 13514 recessed on the back side of the rotation unit 13500 described later, and the end on one side Is projected from the second opening 13452p to the front side (rotation unit 13500 side). Further, the projecting member 13495 includes an axial hole 13495a opened in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450, a bulging portion 13495b bulging to both sides in the vertical direction at an end on the other side, and an inner side of the bulging portion 13495b. And a second magnet 13495c to be disposed.

  The shaft hole 13495a is a hole through which a shaft member 13496 for supporting the projecting member 13495 is inserted. The shaft hole 13495a is formed to have a larger inside diameter than the shaft member 13496, and the shaft member 13496 is inserted. The shaft member 13496 is inserted into the shaft hole 13495a, and the coil spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral surface on the central side in the left-right direction. The coil spring SP1 is disposed in a state of being slightly compressed between the wall portion 13452p1 and the projecting member 13495. Thus, the projecting member 13495 is disposed outside in the left-right direction with respect to the second opening 13452p. Also, the coil spring SP1 biases the projecting member 13495 to a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is parallel to the front-rear direction. Thus, the projecting member 13495 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the side surface on the front side of the front base 13452.

  The second magnet 13495c is a member having magnetism that adsorbs to the first magnet 13452p2 described above, and when the projecting member 13495 is displaced by rotation of a rotation unit 13500 described later, the second magnet 13495c is replaced with the first magnet 13452p2 The projection member can be maintained in a displaced state by adsorbing to the Note that the first magnet 13452p2 is disposed only in the lateral outside portion of the second opening 13452p. As a result, the protruding member 13495 in a state in which the second magnet 13495c is adsorbed to the first magnet 13452p2 is displaced to the inner side in the left-right direction of the second opening 13452p, whereby the second magnet 13495c with the first magnet 13452p2 is moved. The suction is released.

  The displacement member 13430 has a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in a long hole elongated in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 13430, and a connecting shaft 5435 projecting on the decoration member 13450 side on one side in the longitudinal direction. And a release protrusion 13439 rotatably supported at one end of the projecting end of the connecting shaft 5435 in a rotatable manner. The connecting shaft 5435 is disposed in a sliding groove 5452j opened in the rear surface base 13453. When the displacement member 13430 is displaced, the connecting shaft 5435 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j.

  The release projection 13439 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is axially supported by a torsion spring (not shown) supported by the tip of the connection shaft 5435 and disposed between the connection shaft 5435 and the release projection 13439 It is arranged in the posture that points in the direction. Further, in the state where the decoration member 13450 is disposed at the second position, the release projection 13439 rotates the tip (the arrow F direction side) of the release projection 13439 inward in the longitudinal direction of the decoration member 13450 with respect to the connecting shaft 5435 It is made possible. Furthermore, the tip of the release projection 13439 is set to a length that does not overlap with the projecting member 13495 in the front-rear direction when one side of the projecting member 13495 is disposed inside the recess 13514 of the rotation unit 13500 In a state where one side of the projecting member 13495 is disposed outside the concave portion 13514 of the rotation unit 13500 and the second magnet 13495c is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2, the length is set to overlap with the projecting member 13495 in the front-rear direction .

  Thus, when the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 13430 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j in a state where one side of the projecting member 13495 is disposed inside the concave portion 13514 of the rotation unit 13500, the release protrusion 13439 Can be displaced without colliding with the projecting member 13495. Further, in a state where one side of the projecting member 13495 is disposed outside the concave portion 13514 of the rotation unit 13500 and the second magnet 13495c is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2, the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 13430 is the sliding groove 5452j. When sliding inward, the release projection 13439 can be made to collide with the projecting member 13495. As a result, the adsorption of the second magnet 13495c of the projecting member 13495 with the first magnet 13452p2 can be released.

  The rotation unit 13500 has an upper surface base 13510 that forms the upper side surface of the rotation unit 13500, an irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the upper surface base 5510, and is disposed below the irradiation unit 530. , A reflecting plate 560 (see FIG. 28) disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) disposed in front of the reflecting plate 560, and an upper surface It is mainly provided with a rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and a lower surface base 13520 forming the lower side surface of the rotation unit 5500. .

  In addition, the rotation unit 13500 is configured in a rectangular shape, one of which is long in front view, and the front side on the back side of the upper surface base 13510, the intermediate member 13540 and the lower surface base 13520 constituting the outer surface in the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 13500. The recess 13514 is recessed toward the end.

  Note that, as in the first embodiment, the rotation unit 13500 is configured as a versa writer that produces effects by the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, and the rotation transmission unit 570 is similar to the first embodiment. The rotation of the rear base 571 is performed about the center of the gear 571a1.

  Further, the center of gravity of the rotation unit 13500 is set on the rotation axis O, and the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 13500 is horizontal (the posture shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B). In this case, the rotation unit 13500 is prevented from rotating about the rotation axis O by its own weight.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a displacement mode of the projecting member 13495 will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 13400. FIG. 90 (a) corresponds to the cross sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 in FIG. 89 (a), and FIG. 90 (b) corresponds to the cross sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 in FIG. 89 (b). 90 (a) shows a state in which the rotation unit 13500 is rotated from the initial position, and FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which the decoration member 13450 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the rotation unit 13500 is rotationally displaced from the state where one end of the projecting member 13495 is disposed inside the recess 13514 of the rotation unit 13500, the outer surface of the rotation unit 13500 is formed. One end of the projecting member 13495 is pressed in the vertical direction. Thus, the protruding member 13495 is rotationally displaced about the shaft member 13496. In this case, the bulging portion 13495 b formed on the other side of the projecting member 13495 is close to the first magnet 13452 p 2 of the front base 13452. As a result, the second magnet 13495c disposed inside the bulging portion 13495b is adsorbed to the first magnet 13452p2. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is maintained in a tilted state in the direction rotated about the shaft member 13496.

  In this case, the amount of rotation of the projecting member 13495 which is pushed out and rotated by the rotating unit 13500 is such that the bulging portion 13495b forms a slight gap with the first magnet 13452p2, and the first magnet 13452p2 Due to the adsorption with the second magnet 13495c, the gap between the bulging portion 13495b and the first magnet 13452p2 is rotated. Thus, when the protruding member 13495 is maintained in the inclined state, a predetermined gap can be formed between one end of the protruding member 13495 and the rear surface side of the rotation unit 13500. As a result, when the rotation of the rotation unit 13500 is continued, the one side end of the projecting member 13495 can be prevented from contacting the rotation unit 13500.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the case where the adsorption of the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c is released, the decoration member 13450 is displaced to the second position. When the decoration member 13450 is displaced to the second position, the tip end of the release projection 13439 disposed on the displacement member 13430 abuts on the other end (the bulging portion 13495 b) of the projecting member 13495 . Thus, the projecting member 13495 is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the second opening 13452p in accordance with the displacement of the release projection 13439. As a result, the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c are displaced in the left-right direction, so that the adsorption of the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c is released. As a result, the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is displaced to be parallel to the front-rear direction.

  When the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is displaced to be parallel to the front-rear direction, as described above, the projecting member 13495 is not in contact with the tip of the release projection 13439. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is pushed outward in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450 by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 and displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Further, in this case, the projecting member 13495 is disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the decoration member 13450 than the release protrusion 13439. Therefore, when the decoration member 13450 is disposed at the second position, the rotation unit 13500 is rotated, and the projection member 13495 is tilted to bring the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c into a adsorbed state. In this case, the releasing projection 13439 is rotated with respect to the connecting shaft 5435 by displacing the decorating member 13450 to the first position or the third position, and the releasing protrusion 13439 is made of the decoration member 13450 rather than the projecting member 13495. It can be disposed outside in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, by restricting the rotation of the rotation unit 13500 by the projecting member 13495 by releasing the rotation unit 13500 regardless of the position of the decoration member 13450, the rotation of the rotation unit 13500 can be released. The effect area by rotation can be expanded.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  Although the case where the sensor 630 of 1 was arrange | positioned by the center frame 600 was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the two sensors 630 may be disposed symmetrically with respect to the center line of the center frame 600 in the left-right direction. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  Although the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in the frame 610 of the center frame 600 has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be made wide, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  Although the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a convex curved surface in the first embodiment has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center portion. Moreover, you may form as a curved surface convex to a back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be formed in part. It is sufficient that at least light emitted from the sensor 630 be reflected by the cover member 630 and an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 has a role of making the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side and a case where the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is made to make the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized by the player, and the area of reflecting the light emitted from the sensor 630 The area may be divided into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modification. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40 (b), and only the cross section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Furthermore, as for FIG. 56, the external shape of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 arrange | positioned at the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated with a dashed-two dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has the second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 56) and the center side of the second region R2 at the both ends (third symbol display device And a first region R1).

  The first area R1 is an area for making the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the cover member 621 visible from the player, and is formed of a light transmissive material having a relatively high degree of transparency. The second area R2 is an area for reflecting the light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 13. The boundary position between the first area R1 and the second area R2 may be visible to the player located on the front side of the gaming machine 13, so the external shape of the third symbol display device 81 in front view and the outline The same position is preferred. Moreover, in this modification, in order to facilitate understanding, the sensor 630 is described in an aspect of being disposed at both left and right ends.

  In this case, for example, a member with high reflectance such as silver glaze may be coated on the back side or front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

  In addition, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex on the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be flat. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  Although the case where the sensor 630 is disposed forward of the cover member 621 has been described in each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the sensor 630 is disposed rearward of the cover member 621. It may be set. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621 so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Furthermore, in this case, when the cover member 620 has a curved shape convex toward the front side, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, the transmission range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened by transmitting the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side.

  Although in each of the above embodiments, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third ball sending path KR3) of the distribution member 760 are formed to have the same length has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The lengths of 761 (third ball sending route KR3) may be different from each other. In this case, it is possible to give the player an interest because the time until each of the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 is detected by the sensor SE can be made different.

  Although the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described in the first and second embodiments, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed to be constant has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed in a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the cover member 621 and the decoration member 450 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the elastic deformation of the roller 492a is used to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, but it is not always necessary. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is displaceably formed, and the roller 492a is displaced to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form it with a material having a high modulus of elasticity, for example, it can be formed with a resin having a modulus of elasticity lower than that of rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the third embodiment, although the case where the roller 492a disposed in the upper portion abuts on the decorative member 450 earlier than the roller 492a disposed in the lower portion has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The roller 492a may contact the decorative member 450 later than the roller 492a disposed below.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed on the upper portion of the restriction unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated) is in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). (A) In the left and right direction, a predetermined gap may be provided. In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until the contact with the roller 492a is delayed compared to the first and third embodiments, so that the driving motor 441 for driving the decorative member 450 is The time for which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  Although the case where the irradiation control part 544 and the LED 532 are disposed in a state of being in contact with each other has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to suppress that the air stays (remains) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since a flow of air can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the surface roughening is formed into the concavo-convex shape has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the surface may be a surface formed of only projections (protrusions) It may be a surface consisting of only a recess. The roughening may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keystroke, a polygonal diameter, and a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is used as a displacement area of the rotating unit 500. It may be introduced into (rotational area). That is, the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620) may form an atmosphere filled with smoke. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be viewed by the player while passing smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. In addition, it is possible to make only the blinking of the LED 532 visible while concealing the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof by smoke (while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize). Therefore, the rendering effect by the LED 532 (light) can be enhanced.

  In the conventional product, it is difficult for the smoke to be pushed to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotation unit, and for the space described above to be filled with smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each embodiment described above, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the assembled structure of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the air vents 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the space described above can be filled with smoke (retained around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in a smoke-filled atmosphere, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the decorative members 450, 5450, 7450, 8450, 9450 of the vertical displacement units 400, 5400, 6400, 7400, 8400, 9400 are displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical displacement units 400, 5400, 6400, 7400, 8400, 9400 are arranged approximately 90 degrees rotated in a front view, and the decorative members 450, 5450, 7450, 8450, 9450 are in the left-right direction (arrow L It may be in a state of being displaced in the −R direction).

  In the fifth embodiment, the inner surface of the recess 5514 or the one side end of the displacement member 5430 is formed of the same member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, either the inner surface of the recess 5514 or the end surface on one side of the displacement member 5430 may be formed of a rubber-like member that is more easily elastically deformed than a metal material or a hard resin material.

  Thus, when the inner surface of the recess 5514 and the end surface on one side of the displacement member 5430 are abutted and displaced, formation of a flaw on the abutted surface can be suppressed. Also, in this case, by causing the rubber-like member to abut in a state of being elastically displaced, the frictional resistance in the case where the inner surface of the recess 5514 and the end face on one side of the displacement member 5430 are abutted is increased. It is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 or the rotation unit 500 from swinging due to vibration or the like input to the pachinko machine 10.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the one side end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted into the recess 5514 formed in the rotation unit 500. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The rotation of the rotation unit 500 may be restricted by inserting a protruding portion provided at the lower end into the recessed portion provided at the one side end of the displacement member 5430.

  In this case, it is preferable that the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 be disposed on a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the projection of the displacement member 5430. According to this, when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced, one end of the one side of the displacement member 5430 can be hardly displaced in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the displacement member 5430 in the recess. As a result, the displacement member 5430 can be easily inserted into the recess.

  In the fifth embodiment, the connection shaft 5435 is disposed in the displacement member 5430 and the sliding groove 5452j is formed in the front base 5452. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the connecting shaft 5435 may be disposed on the front base 5452, and the sliding groove 5452j may be formed in the displacement member 5430 to connect the both.

  Although the case where the drive of the drive motor 441 which drives the decoration member 5450 is transmitted to the decoration member 5450 via the displacement member 5430 has been described in the fifth embodiment, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the drive of the drive motor 441 for driving the decorative member 5450 may be transmitted to the decorative member 5450 by the rack and pinion. In this case, the formation of the drive side sliding groove 431 formed on the other side of the displacement member 5430 is unnecessary.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the recessed groove 6456a is formed in the gear 456 for detecting the position of rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recessed groove 6456a may be formed in the gear 571a1 formed in the rotating unit 500, or the recessed groove 6456a may be formed in another gear for transmitting a drive for rotating the rotating unit 500. . Further, the concave groove 6456a may be formed in a gear that linearly moves, such as a rack, instead of the gear that is rotated to transmit the drive.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the recessed groove 6456a is formed in the gear 456 having the same gear ratio (outer diameter) as the gear 571a1 disposed in the rotation unit 500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the gear ratio of the gear 456 may be set to a value double that of the gear 571a1 (the outer circumference is doubled). In this case, when the stop position of the rotation unit 500 is shifted from the normal position and stopped, the amount of displacement of the stop position of the gear 456 can be increased. Therefore, the control protrusion 6436 can be made to abut on the inner surface of the concave groove 6456a of the gear 456 to make it easy to rotate the gear 456, and the rotation unit 500 can be easily arranged at the normal position.

  Although the case where the concave groove 6456a is formed only in the region R1 of the gear 456 has been described in the sixth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second recessed groove 6456a may be formed in the area opposite to the area R1 with the virtual line KS3 as a target.

  In this case, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be restricted at a position different in phase by 180 degrees from the initial position by inserting the restriction projection 6436 into the second recessed groove 6456a. That is, a plurality of positions for restricting the rotation can be formed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted by arranging the restriction projection 6436 of the displacement member 6430 disposed on the back side of the decoration member 6450 inside the concave groove 6456a of the gear 456. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be achieved by disposing the restriction projection 6436 of the displacement member 6430 so as to protrude forward of the front base 6453 and arranging the restriction projection 6436 inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. It may be regulated. In this case, the regulation of the rotation unit 5500 may not be performed by the control protrusion 6436, and may be performed by, for example, the connecting shaft 5435.

  In this case, in the fifth embodiment, the displacing member 5430 for displacing the decorative member 5450 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D) is disposed on the player side to facilitate visual recognition by the player. Since the displacement member 6430 can be disposed on the back side of the decoration member 6450, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement member 6430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the displacement unit 7900 projects to the front side, the displacement unit 7900 is brought into contact with the displacement member 5430 to restrict the displacement of the displacement unit 7900. The present invention is not limited to this. When the displacement unit 7900 retracts to the back side, the back side of the displacement unit 7900 may be brought into contact with the displacement member 5430 to restrict the displacement of the displacement unit 7900.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the rotatably supported portion 8942 of the rotation unit 8940 protrudes in the form of a rectangular cross section having a predetermined size on the slide unit 8930 side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross section protruding toward the through hole 8942 may be formed small. This modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 (a) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit 8400 as a modification, and FIG. 91 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 taken along line XCIb-XCIb of FIG. 91 (a). In FIG. 91 (a), the outer shape of the supported portion 8942 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the pivoted support portion 8942 is a portion supported by the above-described slide unit 8930, and the protruding tip end is disposed in the space formed by the pair of concave portions 8931a of the slide unit 8930. Further, the supported portion 8942 mainly includes a through hole 8942a penetrating in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction) at the protruding tip end, and an insertion portion 8942c bulging in both sides (arrow L-R direction) in the left and right direction. Prepare for

  The insertion portion 8942 c is formed in a substantially triangular shape in cross section and bulges toward one side of the displacement member 5430. Further, in the insertion portion 8942c, the bulging tip end portion is configured such that the bulging distance in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) in the protruding direction of the shaft support portion 8942 is reduced. It is formed along the direction from the center of the through hole 8942 toward the radially outer side. As a result, when the slide unit 8930 is slid and abuts on one end of the displacement member 5430, one of the displacement member 5430 is restricted in accordance with the restriction due to the contact with the one end of the displacement member 5430. The contact area with the side end can be increased. Therefore, when the slide unit 8930 is slid as much as possible, the contact area between the supported portion 8942 and the displacement member 5430 can be maximized, so that the force acting on the contact surface can be dispersed. Damage to the displacement member 5430 and the rotation unit 8942 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a receiving portion 5438 which is recessed in a substantially triangular shape in cross section is formed at one end of the displacement member 5430. The inner edge of the receiving portion 5438 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer edge of the insertion portion 8942c described above. Further, the receiving portion 5438 is set at the same height as the insertion portion 8942 c in a state where the decorative member 8950 is disposed at the second position. Thus, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the insertion portion 8942 c can be inserted into and brought into contact with the inside of the receiving portion 5438. In this case, since the insertion portion 8942c and the reception portion 5438 are formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same cross-sectional shape, the insertion is performed when the stop position of the displacement member 5430 is slightly stopped from the normal position. The relative inclination of the portion 8942c and the receiving portion 5438 can be used to rotate the displacement member 5430 to a normal position.

  In the ninth embodiment, the protrusion 9430 d of the displacement member 9430 is inserted into the recessed portion (inserted portion 9941 a) of the rotation unit 9940. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, The protrusion 9430 d may be disposed at a position where it collides with the end of the rotation unit 9940 in the displacement direction.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where both the slide unit 9930 and the rotation unit 9940 are displaced when the displacement member 9430 is displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Each may be displaced independently.

  Although the case where the side wall 10515 of the rotation unit 10500 is formed as a plane has been described in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment, it may be formed as a recess that is recessed on the side of the rotation shaft.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted by disposing the one side end portion of the displacement member 5430 inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 500 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, one end of the displacement member 5430 may be disposed on the top of the rotation unit 500 in the rotation area of the rotation unit 500 to restrict the rotation of the rotation unit 500. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (a) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification. In FIG. 92, the sliding groove 14452 j and the connecting shaft 5435 are illustrated by a chain line. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, in the decorative member 5450 of the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, a sliding groove 14452j formed in the front base 5452 is formed above the rotation axis O of the rotation unit 500. Be done. The sliding groove 14452 j is formed in one long elongated hole, and its longitudinal direction is formed toward the rotation axis O.

  Thus, when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the first position or the third position to the second position, the sliding groove 14452j from the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 500 at one end of the displacement member 5430 And may be disposed above the rotation unit 500 along the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 500. Further, when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the second position to the first position or the third position, the one side end of the displacement member 5430 can easily form a gap with the upper surface of the rotation unit 500. As a result, the displacement member 5430, which is rotationally displaced when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the second position to the first position or the third position (especially when displaced to the third position), contacts the outer surface of the rotation unit 500. It is possible to suppress contact.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the decorative member 5450 is disposed at the first position or the third position, the imaginary line KS1 and the imaginary line KS2 are arranged substantially orthogonal to each other to have a dead point relationship. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 may be arranged in a substantially orthogonal state at the second position.

  This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92 (b) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification. Note that FIG. 92 (b) corresponds to the front view of FIG. 59 (b). The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, a transmission gear 443 and a transmission gear 15442 meshed with the transmission gear 442 are disposed between the transmission gear 443 and the transmission gear 442. . Accordingly, the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 can be disposed below the displacement member 5430 in the restricted state.

  In the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, when one side of the displacement member 5430 is disposed inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500, the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the axis of the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 The connecting virtual line KS1 is substantially orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the axis of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430 and the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443.

  Thus, when the rotational driving force is applied to the rotation unit 5500 in a state in which the rotation is restricted by the displacement member 5430 due to a control failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the rotation of the displacement member 5430 can be suppressed. That is, when the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is regulated by the displacement member 5430, the displacement member 5430 and the transmission gear 443 have a dead point relationship to transmit the external force input to one side of the displacement member 5430. It can suppress that the gear 443 is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be restricted even when the rotation unit 5500 is given a driving force for rotation due to a control failure or the like.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and has a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<On the Concept of the Invention Taking Center Cover 620 as an Example>
A game board having an opening at the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light by an object of the light And a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the light transmitting material being disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front being formed as a convex curved surface A game machine A1 comprising a front member comprising:

  Here, a game board having an opening at the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and light and emitting an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) There is known a gaming machine provided with a sensor device (motion sensor) for detecting the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light (for example, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, when the sensor device is visibly exposed from the player, the player's interest is lost. Therefore, the sensor device is disposed on the back side of the decoration member and is less likely to be viewed by the player. The sensor device emits light through the side open portion of the decorative member and receives reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object, and the sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The further away from the part (the more backward the device is), the less it can be seen by the player, but the narrower the range in which the object can be detected, and the open side of the decorative member with the sensor device. The closer the device is to the object, the wider the object detectable range can be, but the more easily it can be seen by the player. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for a player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and is made of a light transmitting material The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be disposed apart from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side) accordingly, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device, and an object to be provided. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light transmitting material, the visibility of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor device is reflected on the front surface of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is made more acute at a position near the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each of the reflections) can be made more obtuse, which makes it easy to expand the range in which the object can be detected. The same applies to the case where light reflected by an object is reflected at the front of the front member.

  In the gaming machine A1, a gaming machine A2 characterized in that a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the front member acts as a convex lens because the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as a curved surface is set to a substantially constant value. Can be secured to ensure the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Further, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing another member (displaceable displacement member) can be secured.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member which is formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and in the front member, the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side than the second part. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is disposed at the position where

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side relative to the second portion. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the disc and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased within the limited space.

  The first part of the front member is disposed substantially the same as the back of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the back of the game board, and the second part of the front member is more than the back of the game board A game machine A4 characterized in that it is disposed at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the back of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the back of the game board Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be more reliably suppressed, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Further, since the second part of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be further increased. It can be used easily as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a center frame disposed at the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the back side of the gaming board and the back side of the front member A game machine A5 comprising: a main body member; and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second part is connected to the center frame, so the displacing member (body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. By the second part (front member), the generated wind can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball by the action of the wind. In addition, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, it can be blocked by the second portion (front member), so the blown dust or dust is emitted by the sensor device. -It can suppress that the accuracy of detection falls soaring to the optical path of light reception.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which balls are rollably formed, and a second portion of the front member is connected to at least a range of the center frame including the stage. A game machine A6.

  Here, as a stage of the center frame, it is conventionally known that a back wall is provided so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around to the front side from the standing end of the back wall erected from the stage, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board Affect the balls rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to make the balls rolling on the stage not to be affected by the wind, the back wall is curved to the front side to cover the circumference of the balls of the stage (that is, to form a closed passage) Since the player hardly recognizes the ball rolling on the stage, the fun of the game is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the second part of the front member is connected to the range including at least the stage of the center frame, so the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated thereby can be blocked by the second part (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the sphere by the action of the wind while making it easy for the player to visually recognize the balls rolling on the stage.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined distance from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame, and the gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in any of the gaming machines A5 and A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined distance from the inner edge at the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotation member) from staying on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a region on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the area above the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by can be made to flow toward the upper area (the area above the opening of the game board) of the game area, and it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball by the action of the wind. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball fired from the launcher and flowed into the game area, and since its speed is relatively high, it rolls over the stage of the center frame, for example. Less susceptible to wind compared to moving balls. In other words, the wind can be directed to the area where the sphere is less susceptible to the influence of the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotation member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacing member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is the vertical upper side of the peripheral edge of the front member. It is possible to form a gap (a predetermined interval) which is formed in the area, that is, the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member communicate with each other on the upper side. As a result, the heat generated from the displacing member (body member or rotating member) can be easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member. It can be suppressed.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A8, a game machine A9 characterized in that the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the front member substantially faces the player's face (faces the front). Therefore, when the front of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from fluorescent lamps and other game machines installed on the ceiling of the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, There is a possibility that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be deteriorated (the light from the fluorescent lamp or the other game machine may be reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another game machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress such light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It can be suppressed that the player feels dazzling and the visibility of the liquid crystal display device is deteriorated.

  In the gaming machine A9, a first portion of the front member is formed in an area on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, and at least a thickness dimension of a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is approximately A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the horizontal direction component is increased as the front surface positioned vertically upward while being set to a fixed value.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the region above the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface The thickness dimension of the portion is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component increases toward the front located vertically upward, so the air warmed by the heat generated from the displacement member (body member or rotating member) Can be raised along the back of the front member, and the raised air (heat) can be communicated to the first portion of the front member (a gap (a predetermined distance between the back of the game board and the front member and the front) Can be easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat buildup on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Distribution Device 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and in which a bending portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member has an opening formed in a side wall of the bending portion. A game machine B1 characterized by.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (e.g., JP-A-2015-97764). In this case, forming a bend in part of the passage member is also performed. By forming the bent portion, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position at which the ball is made to flow out of the passage into the game area), so the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of balls in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through a bend in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the leading ball catches up, and the ball following the leading ball presses against the side wall, so that both can not roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the passage member is provided with the opening formed in the side wall of the bending portion, when passing through the bending portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected in a row, Even if the running balls catch up, it is difficult to press the preceding balls against the side wall, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed of a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and in which the first portion and the passing direction of the sphere are different. Means the range to be In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be straightly extending passages, or may be curvilinearly curved extending passages, or May be a channel having a combined shape.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending substantially in the vertical direction and an extending passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage, and the opening is the vertical A game machine B2 formed in a region where a passage and the extended passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member is a vertical passage extending substantially vertically and an extending passage extending downward from the vertical passage. And the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

  That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect is a position where the ball flowing down (falling) the vertical passage changes its direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, It is easy for the ball following the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the ball following the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both can not roll and ball clogging is likely to occur. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, the opening is formed in the area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the leading ball is made to the side wall It can be hard to press and it can be easy to continue rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and is formed on left and right side walls when a ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Game machine B3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage Since it is formed on the left and right side walls, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the left and right side walls, and it becomes easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, a back wall side where the ball rolls along the extending direction of the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending passage, which is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect. The game machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface which is inclined downward at an angle larger than a downward inclination of the extension passage is formed on the side wall of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, in the area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface and the extending direction of the extending passage Since the side wall on the back side when the ball rolls is formed with an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage, the ball flowing down (falling) the vertical passage changes direction When rolling is started in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled using the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easy to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball rolls the ball along the extension direction of the extension passage by the trailing ball. Since it can suppress pressing on the side wall of the back side at the time of doing, rolling of both can be made to be easy to continue. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The inclination of the inclined surface may be linear inclination, curved inclination, or a combination of these. In addition, the descending inclination angle of the inclined surface does not have to be a larger angle than the descending inclination angle of the extended passage throughout the inclined surface, and the descending inclination angle of at least a part of the inclined surface extends If the angle is larger than the downward inclination angle of the passage, it is sufficient.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the gaming board is provided with a gaming area on the front side, and at least a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bending portion of the passage member is the game A game machine B5 characterized in that it is disposed on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member (ie, the portion where the opening is formed ) Is disposed on the front side of the game board, so if a ball clogged in the bent portion of the passage member, the ball is clogged in the bent portion on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging can be improved.

  In any one of game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a ball from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the gaming machine B6 is formed in a range including.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the ball from the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface. Since the ball is formed in the range including the height position, the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage can be easily received in the opening when the ball reaches the bottom wall of the extending passage. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a gaming board having a gaming area formed on the front side is provided, and at least a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bending portion of the passage member is the game A game machine B7, which is disposed on the front side of the board, and the opening is formed in a size through which a ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, at least a portion of the bending portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, a portion where an opening is formed) The opening is disposed on the front side of the disc, and the opening is formed in a size through which the ball can pass, so it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of the ball clogging.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball can not pass through, it is usually possible to use the opening to make it difficult to press the leading ball against the side wall, but exceptionally, the trailing ball A form may be formed to press the leading ball into the center of the opening, and the leading ball may be fitted into the opening. In this case, the rolling of the following ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening, and the ball clogs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even if the following ball is formed to press the leading ball toward the center of the opening, the leading ball is released from the outside of the passage member from the opening (on the front side of the game board It is possible to discharge to the game area, and it is possible to prevent the preceding ball from being fitted into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the ball following can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Also, in this way, an opening is formed with a size through which the ball can pass, and the opening is disposed on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area) to allow the ball to flow down the game area. It can flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the bending portion, in addition to the ball flowing into the passage member from the upstream side of the bending portion, the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening is also a winning hole. It can be detected. In this case, in particular, the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player visually recognizes the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 7, a gaming machine B8 characterized in that a lower end of an inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from a bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the bottom wall of the extending passage. Side walls can be left (formed) between the bottom wall of the Therefore, even in the case where an opening is formed in a size through which the ball can pass, unnecessary outflow of the ball from the passage member to the outside (playing area) can be suppressed through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bending portion and connected to the upstream side of the bending portion and extended in a substantially straight line along the width direction of the gaming area And a pair of the passage members are disposed in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside the game area in the width direction. A game machine B9 characterized in that a winning device is positioned between the bends in the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bending portion, and is connected to the upstream side of the bending portion and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming area A pair of passage members are disposed in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outward in the width direction of the game area The winning device is located between.

  In this case, if the descending inclination angle of the inclined passage is small (the descending inclination is gentle), the flow-down speed of the ball becomes low, and the ball clogs easily in the bent portion. On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in the bent portion. The space in the required height direction is large, and the arrangement of the winning device becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed on the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the bent portion, and accordingly, the descent inclination angle of the inclined passage is reduced. The downslope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the inclined passage can be reduced, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is an arrangement that can not be achieved by the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion. .

  The gaming machine B9 is provided with a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, and at least the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bending portion of the passage member is on the front side of the gaming board At least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bending portion of the passage member disposed on the front side of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. A game machine B10 characterized by.

  Here, an opening is formed at the center of the game board, and the player visually recognizes the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, as the size of the liquid crystal display device has been increased, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, and the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange a member corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the gaming area there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is reduced (the downward inclination is made gentle), the flow-down speed of the ball becomes low, and the ball clogs easily in the bent portion. On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow-down speed of the ball can be increased to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in the bent portion. The space in the required height direction is large, and the arrangement of the winning device becomes difficult. In addition, since the disposition position in the vertical direction of the bending portion is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bending portion and the lower edge of the game area. It is necessary to provide an outlet on each side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the formation of the opening in the side wall of the bending portion makes it difficult to cause ball clogging in the bending portion. The angle of the downward slope of the passage can be reduced (the downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the disposition position in the vertical direction of the bending portion can be raised (high), so that a gap through which a ball can pass can be secured between the bending portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to provide an out mouth each on the both sides of a bending part. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning apparatus described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bending portion and the lower edge of the gaming area) This is an arrangement which can not be achieved by the conventional product, and as described above, this is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotary display device which has a plurality of light emitting means and blinks the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage effect by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device includes the plurality of light emitting means And a base member for rotatably supporting the main body member, the main body member transmitting the light of the light emitting means; A game machine C1 having a plurality of through holes formed in a side wall facing the rotational direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotary display device which has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position to perform an afterimage display by an afterimage effect (for example, JP-A-2015-100385 and JP-A-2015-053968 etc.).

  In this case, in the technique of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, the light emitting means is exposed, so the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technology of JP-A-2015-053968, the light of the light emitting means is visually recognized through the light transmitting member (push button). Thus, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is disposed is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, and thus there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present invention has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported by the base member. Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, it is difficult for the light emitting means to be visually recognized, and the appearance is not lost. Further, since the afterimage display by the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized in the state where the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, the problem that cooling of the light emitting means is difficult is newly found. If the light emitting means (LED) and the IC, capacitor, etc. controlling it are soldered to the substrate, the solder melts if the heat generation during operation of the light emitting means and the IC, capacitor can not be sufficiently cooled. , There is a risk of contact failure.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the main body member is provided with a plurality of through holes formed in the side wall facing in the rotational direction, when the main body member is rotated, the plurality of through holes form the main body member The outside air can be taken into the interior of the house. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the main body member is formed in a container-like shape whose back side is opened.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened, so the outside air taken in from the through hole of the side wall is efficiently from the back side. It can be evacuated. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress that such exhaust air affects the balls flowing down (or rolls the stage) in the game area.

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is an elongated shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is the back in the longitudinal direction end A game machine C3 characterized in that it is formed in a curved shape that retracts to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, a view in the rotation axis direction) which has an elongated shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, the air inside the body member can be made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward in rotation) by using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the body member, and the air can be exhausted from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of the air, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back surface side at and near the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotational speed is low at and near the rotation shaft, the efficiency of taking in external air from the through holes in the side wall is poor (or can not be taken), air circulation using centrifugal force (back surface in the rotation shaft and its vicinity) External air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in external air is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radially outer side) be able to. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the luminous means arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis can be achieved.

  In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, the main body member has a rectangular shape), the longitudinal end (during rotation) Since the angle of the portion of the air which is flowed outward in the radial direction of (1) is turned to the back side is substantially at a right angle, vortices are easily formed in such a portion. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the rear side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the back side toward the longitudinal end side, so that the longitudinal end side (during rotation by centrifugal force) The air flowed radially outward can be made to flow gradually to the back side, and the angle of the portion at which the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward) is turned towards the back side Can be made larger than approximately a right angle, so that the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed and the air flow can be made smooth. Therefore, exhaust from the rear side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, it is possible to more reliably achieve the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft.

  In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine is characterized in that the main body member has a rotary shaft and an open area on the rear side in the vicinity of the rotary shaft larger than an open area on the rear side on the longitudinal end side Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has the rotary shaft and the open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotary shaft from the open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side Since the air inside the body member is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by using the centrifugal force accompanying rotation, from the rear side on the radially outer side By evacuating, when external air is taken in from the back side in the rotation shaft and its vicinity, the take-in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, a rotary shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotary shaft are formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotary shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has the rotary shaft and the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotary shaft formed in a circle concentric with the rotary shaft. It is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back surface side of the rotation shaft and its vicinity (the formation of a flow in the rotation direction) with the rotation of the rotation shaft. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft.

  In any one of game machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member for rotatably supporting the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. A game machine C6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member to the base member reduces the diameter as going from the back side to the back side of the main body member Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be made smooth, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, the external air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the rotation shaft and the vicinity thereof, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the rotation shaft and the vicinity thereof can be achieved more reliably.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is stored in the main body member in a posture in which the side on which the light emitting means is mounted or the side opposite to the side is faced to the side wall of the main body member. Feature game machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface is faced to the side wall of the main body member Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed in the side wall can be efficiently sprayed to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat dissipation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC and the capacitor operate. Further, the substrate is accommodated in the main body member in such a manner that the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, the width dimension in a front view of the main body member (dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) ) Can be made smaller. As a result, in the state in which the main body member (rotational display device) is stopped, the visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side can be secured.

  A game machine C8 according to any one of the game machines C1 to C7, comprising smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement area of a main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device is provided, Can. Further, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while the rotary display device is hidden by the smoke, and the effect by the light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, the smoke is pushed to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, and it is difficult to obtain the effect of the smoke. However, according to the present invention, the through hole is formed in the main body member Is formed, and the ambient air can be circulated, so that the smoke can be retained around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in the atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be exhibited.

  As a smoke generating device, for example, a type in which an aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), a liquid (aqueous or oil) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor, A type in which the particles are retained as fine particles, a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected, and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening at the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed visibly through the opening of the game board, and a front side of the liquid crystal display device are provided and projected on the front side And a front member made of a light transmitting material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening at the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed visibly through the opening of the gaming board, and a front surface of the liquid crystal display device A front member disposed on the side and curved in a convex shape on the front side and made of a light transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member As a result, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to make the light emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blink stand out, or to make only the blink of the light emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device by the smoke. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, it is possible to easily keep smoke in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light rendering effect using the smoke described above.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
A base member, a body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the body member, wherein the body member is at least In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in a state of being disposed at a first position, a rotary member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the body member, and the body member being disposed at the first position And a contact member which is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member so as to be in contact with the base member or the other of the main body member, and the main body member is disposed in the first position. A game machine D1 characterized in that a displacement direction at the time of movement and a rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially in parallel.

  Here, the base member includes a base member, a main body member displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, the main body member comprising There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is displaceably formed in a state of being disposed at a first position (for example, JP-A-2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle against the base member in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Therefore, there is one that is provided with an engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member to suppress the rattling. The engagement means is formed on one of the main body member or the base member, and is formed to be engageable with the engagement member and to the other of the main body member or the base member. And an engaged member to be disposed, and utilizing the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the main body member with respect to the base member, retract the engaging member against the urging force of the urging means, the main body When the member is in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means to engage with the engaged member. Thus, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engagement means, and rattling of the main body member against the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engagement means, in order to bring the engagement means into engagement (place the main body member in the first position), the engagement member is pushed against the biasing force of the biasing means. Not only when it is necessary to retract but also when the engagement state of the engagement means is released (displacement of the main body member from the first position toward the second position), against the biasing force of the biasing means There is a problem that it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and the driving force required to displace the main body member relative to the base member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotary member rotatably supported on one of the base member or the main body member and the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position Since the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative movement of the main member to the base member is achieved since the contact member is provided with the contact member that faces the other side of the base member or the main body member. It is possible to restrict the displacement of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member, thereby suppressing rattling of the base member. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the rotational direction of the rotating member are set substantially in parallel, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and from the first position When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force necessary for displacing the main body member relative to the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least an outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body which can be elastically deformed.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D1, at least the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed, so the contact member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed to make it easy to hold the rotating member on the contact member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotation member, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, whereby rattling of the main body member against the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an elastic body, it is preferable that it is a viscoelastic body illustrated by rubber | gum, urethane, etc. In this case, due to the damping effect, the vibration damping function or the vibration insulation function can be performed to damp and insulate the vibration input from the main body member to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. This is because wear and failure of various devices provided and loosening of the fastening portion can be suppressed. In particular, when the displacing member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations from the main body member to the base member It is particularly effective to adopt a visco-elastic body because the

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotary member is formed so as to be radially displaceable, and one of the base member or the main body member is in the state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. A game machine D3 including a facing member disposed so as to face the contact member in a sandwiching manner and facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be in contact therewith.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be radially displaceable, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In the state, since the facing member is disposed to face the contact member across the rotation member and includes the facing member that is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member so as to be contactable, When the contact member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be in contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotation member, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, whereby rattling of the main body member against the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form which enables displacement of the rotation member in the radial direction, for example, a form in which a shaft for rotatably supporting the rotation member is formed to be radially displaceable, a shaft for rotatably supporting the rotation member The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotary member receiving the shaft, the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotary member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member receiving the shaft And the like.

  The gaming machine D3 includes a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body in an annular shape in cross section including a shaft support hole into which the shaft is inserted. The game machine D4 is characterized in that the displacement of the rotating member in the radial direction is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member When the rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to the rattling of the member, the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body) is used to rotate the abutting member and the opposing member. It is easy to hold the member more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotation member, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, whereby rattling of the main body member against the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, by displacing the rotating member in the radial direction using elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted into the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not have to be formed as an axis, but can be formed as an axis fixed to one of the base member or the body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified to improve the durability and reduce the product cost.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the rotating member is disposed in a pair on one of the base member or the body member, and the pair of rotating members are disposed when the body member is disposed to the first position. A game machine D5 characterized by being arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members is disposed on one of the base member or the main body member, and the pair of rotating members is the main body member Because they are juxtaposed with a predetermined distance in the direction of displacement at the time of being disposed at one position, the main body accompanying displacement of the displacement member while restraining the driving force necessary when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member The rattling of the member to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the contact member being in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, and the target to be in contact with the contact member is only one rotation member. If there is, there is a possibility that the rotation member is rotated and the contact member may tilt, and the tilt of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotation member is a factor of rattling of the main member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval, and the contact members abut with the pair of rotating members at two positions with a predetermined interval. Thus, the rotary member can be abutted without being rotated, and tilting of the abutting member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member against the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is a side of the contact surface on which the rotary member is to be received when the main body member is disposed to the first position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that the end portion is formed with an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it is separated from the contact surface.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the abutting member is disposed when the main member of the abutting surface on which the rotating member is abutted to the first position An inclined surface is formed at the end of the side for receiving the rotation member, which is inclined downward as it is separated from the contact surface, so that when the main body member is placed in the first position, the inclined surface is used. The rotary member can be guided to the abutment surface of the abutment member. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position can be suppressed.

  A game machine D7 according to any one of game machines D1 to D6, wherein the rotating member is disposed on the base member, and the contact member is disposed on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively large. Since it is not necessary to arrange the bulky rotation member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Moreover, when suppressing rattling with respect to the base member of the main body member accompanying displacement of a displacement member, rattling can be easily suppressed by reducing the weight of the main body member serving as the vibration source.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a contact surface on which a rotation plane of the displacement member is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member. And a rotation axis of the rotation member.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotational plane of the displacement member is the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force necessary for disposing the main body member to the first position and for displacing it from the first position to the second position, since it is substantially parallel to the abutting surface to be abutted and the rotation shaft of the rotating member. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member against the base member accompanying displacement (rotation) of the displacement member while suppressing

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession movement of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings a circle). It vibrates in the mode (mode) to make it Therefore, by making the rotation plane of the displacement member substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member It can press on the outer peripheral surface of a rotation member from direction. As a result, when disposing the main body member to the first position and displacing from the first position to the second position, the rotation member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force necessary for displacing the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, rattling of the main body member to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  One of the game machines D1 to D8 includes driving means for generating driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace between the first position and the second position, The transmitting means includes: a rotating body rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means; and a crank member having a pin portion eccentrically offset from the first axis of the rotating body and projecting from the rotating body. The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove in which the pin portion slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove so that the main body member is rotated with the second axis as a rotation center. And a linear member connecting a first axis of the crank member and an axial center of the pin portion in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, and a second axis of the arm member. Pin of said crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotation member are set substantially in parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is the direction from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction, the rotating member is easily rotated in such a direction, It becomes difficult to exhibit the effect of rattling suppression by a rotation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is the second axis of the arm member and the crank Because it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, a force component in the direction to rotate the crank member is not formed even if the body member tries to rotate the arm member by its displacement ( That is, a dead point can be formed. That is, rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction can be suppressed. As a result, even if the rattling direction of the main body member is the direction from the first position to the second position or the reverse direction (that is, the direction in which the rotating member tends to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead points Shaping of the main body member can be effectively suppressed by forming.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Control Unit 490 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotary display device which has a plurality of light emitting means and blinks the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage effect by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device includes the plurality of light emitting means And a base member for rotatably supporting the main body member, and the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted. A game machine E1 housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to a rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotary display device which has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position to perform an afterimage display by an afterimage effect (for example, JP-A-2015-100385 and JP-A-2015-053968 etc.). However, in the above-described prior art, the substrate has a posture in which the plane on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, a plane of rotation with the light emitting means directed to the front side (player's side) Since the parallel posture is adopted, the external shape in front view (rotational axis direction view) is enlarged. Therefore, there is a problem that in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member. And the substrate is accommodated in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, thereby suppressing the outer shape of the main body member in front view (rotational axis direction view) be able to. As a result, in the state in which the rotation of the rotary display (the main body member) is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, a game machine E2 characterized in that the rotary display device includes an opposing member disposed opposite to the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes the facing member disposed opposite to the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player's side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the attitude of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (flashing) of the light emitting means is visually recognized by the player to perform afterimage display by the afterimage effect. Can.

  In the gaming machine E2, the opposing member is provided with a plurality of recesses which are recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extended in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. A game machine E3 characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the facing member is recessed on the surface facing the substrate and a plurality of recessed portions extending in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member And the plurality of light emitting means are respectively opposed to the plurality of recessed portions, so that light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means is respectively transmitted through the plurality of recessed portions of the opposing member to Can be emitted to the That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being divided by each concave portion, it is possible to make the division of the light of each light emitting means clear. As a result, it is possible to make the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect clear.

  In the gaming machine E3, the recessed portion of the opposing member includes an end section partition wall that defines an end opposite to the front side of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3, the recessed portion of the facing member is provided with an end partition wall that divides the end opposite to the front side of the rotary display device. The light irradiated to the recess of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player's side) of the rotary display. Therefore, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting unit faces the end partition wall of the recess. A game machine E5 characterized by being disposed.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in the direction away from the light emitting means toward the front of the rotary display device, and the light emitting unit is the end partition of the recess Since it is disposed at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be irradiated to the end section wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. it can. Therefore, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the game machines E3 to E5, the recess of the opposing member is characterized in that a part of its inner surface is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, since the concave portion of the opposing member is formed as a part of the inner surface as the uneven surface, the light emitted from the light emitting means is The light can be emitted to the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress that light emitted from the opening of the recess is viewed in a state of being biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface formed of only a protrusion (projection), or may be a surface formed of only a recess (depression). The projections or depressions may be extended as strips or grooves. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the convex and concave may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a shape combining these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end portion on the front side of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the concave portion of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is A gaming machine E7 characterized in that it is formed as a surface smoother than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end on the front side of the rotary display device of the inner surface of the recess of the opposing member, The inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, so that light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player's side) of the rotary display device. It can increase the light intensity. That is, when an uneven surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end on the front side of the rotary display of the inner surface of the recess of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected by the uneven surface, and the front side of the rotary display ( The light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is made smoother than the uneven surface, thereby suppressing irregular reflection and front side of the rotary display device. It is possible to increase the light toward (the player side).

  In the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine is characterized in that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is increased as it goes to the front end of the rotary display device (Ie, the diameter is expanded), the light emitted toward the front side (player's side) of the rotary display device can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

  In any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the opposing members are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surfaces are disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, A game machine E9 characterized in that the length dimension of the main body member in the direction along the rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is the main surface of the main member as the concave and convex surfaces are spaced apart radially outward Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, it is possible to make the lightness (brightness of light) visually recognized of each of the plurality of recesses uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center), so if the light emitting means arranged in a row emits light at the same brightness, the rotation The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks brighter (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is larger as the uneven surface disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member is spaced apart The concave portion (light emitting means) spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member is strengthened by irregular reflection by the uneven surface (that is, the ratio of light visually recognized by the player directly from the light emitting means is decreased) Can be viewed as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to make the lightness (brightness of light) uniform by suppressing the difference in the brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction.

  In any one of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided covering the front end of the rotary display in the recess of the opposing member and provided with a light transmissive material, and the cover member is provided with the cover member. A game machine E10 characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in an area facing the end of the recess.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover formed on the front end of the rotary display in the recess of the facing member and formed of a light transmitting material A member is provided, and the cover member is provided with an uneven surface at least in an area facing the end of the recess, so that light is irregularly reflected by the uneven surface, and the front side of the rotary display (player side It can be emitted towards). That is, since the emitted light can be expanded, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

  In any one of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-like interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member is provided, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of recessed portions. A game machine E11 having a through hole formed at a position through which the through hole is formed.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 is provided with a plate-like interposed member interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the interposed member comprises a plurality of interposed members Since the through holes are formed at the positions where the light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions are communicated, the light of each light emitting means is reliably made incident on the corresponding concave portions and is prevented from being incident (leaked) to the adjacent concave portions it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding recess, and the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, according to the gaming machine E11, since the structure for causing the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from two members, the opposing member and the intervening member, The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the members are used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seating.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E11, the interposed member is provided with a seat that abuts the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat, so that the light of each light emitting means Can be made easy to enter the through hole, and it is possible to suppress the leakage to the outside of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. Further, since the seat portion is in contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through hole, so that the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through holes are formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Are arranged concentrically. A game machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through hole is formed in a circular shape in cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, an inside diameter of the through hole is expanded from the substrate side toward the opposing member. A gaming machine E14.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E13, the through hole is expanded in diameter from the substrate side toward the opposing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is passed through the through hole. It can be made to inject efficiently to a crevice via. Further, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, the light of each light emitting means can be prevented from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  In any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the interposed member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface facing the substrate of the interposed member, so the portion corresponding to the protrusion faces the substrate A space can be formed between the members, and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

  In the gaming machine E15, the interposed member includes a groove-shaped groove portion which is recessed on a surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine E15, the opposing member is provided with a groove-like groove which is recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat, the rigidity of the interposed member can be secured while minimizing the area recessed in the interposed member. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced by expanding the space to a portion where the heat generated by the operation particularly concentrates.

  In the game machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is characterized in that the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surface of each other are connected.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portions and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be enhanced.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat may be circular, and the adjacent seat and the outer peripheral surfaces may be connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seat portions are connected to each other is formed to have an uneven outer shape, so a space is secured to enhance the heat dissipation effect, and the rigidity of the interposed member is utilized by using the uneven outer shape. It can be raised.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Distribution Device 4700 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and a first benefit granting means disposed downstream of the passage member and giving a predetermined benefit as the ball passes. An opening formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first benefit giving means so as to allow passage of the ball, and the ball flowing out from the opening into the game area is formed so as to be able to pass A game machine F1 comprising: second benefit grant means for granting a predetermined benefit along with the passage of the game.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (e.g., JP-A-2015-97764). On the downstream side of such a passage member, a sensor device for detecting passage of the ball of the passage member is disposed, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device), and while the space required for the arrangement is increased, the amusement is given to the game There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first benefit giving means, the first benefit giving means gives a predetermined benefit. In this case, an opening is formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first benefit giving means so as to allow passage of the ball, and the ball flowing out from the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass through. Since it is provided with a second benefit giving means for giving a predetermined benefit along with the passage of the ball, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member Can pass a second benefit awarding means, the second benefit awarding means can award a predetermined benefit. Thus, the ball guided to the passage member not only passes through the first benefit providing means, but also flows out from the opening to the game area, and further, the spilled ball passes through the second benefit applying means A form can be formed, and an interest can be given to a game.

  Note that the second benefit awarding means may be disposed at a position that can receive all of the balls that flowed out of the opening into the game area or, depending on the state of the ball that flowed out of the opening into the game area, It may be disposed at a position where the ball of the part receives and the part of the ball does not receive.

  Further, the benefit provided by the first benefit applying means and the benefit provided by the second benefit applying means may be the same benefit or may be different benefits.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bending portion formed in a part of the passage member, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bending portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, if a bend is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the ball in the bend is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through a bend in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the leading ball catches up, and the ball following the leading ball presses against the side wall, so that both can not roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member is provided with the opening formed in the side wall of the bending portion, when passing through the bending portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected in a row, Even if the running balls catch up, it is difficult to press the preceding balls against the side wall, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed of a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and in which the first portion and the passing direction of the sphere are different. Means the range to be In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be straightly extending passages, or may be curvilinearly curved extending passages, or May be a channel having a combined shape.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bending portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the gaming board Feature game machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bending portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When a ball jam occurs, by opening the glass plate, on the front side of the game board, the ball clogged in the bending portion can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging can be improved. Further, when the game ball flows out to the game area from the opening of the passage member, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the flowing out mode, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine F3, a gaming machine F4 characterized in that at least the entrance of the second benefit giving means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F3, at least the entrance of the second benefit means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, so the gaming ball flows out to the gaming area from the opening of the passage member. When playing, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the mode in which the outflowed ball enters the ball entrance of the second benefit giving means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the game machine comprises a connection passage for connecting the second benefit giving means to the passage member and guiding the ball having passed the second benefit giving means to the passage member, the connection passage being A game machine F5 connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first benefit giving means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second bonus giving means is connected to the passage member, and the connection passage is provided for guiding the ball passing the second benefit giving means to the passage member. Since the connection passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first benefit giving means, the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the flowed-out ball is When passing through the 2 benefit giving means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage to pass through the first benefit giving means. Therefore, in addition to the awarding of the benefit by the second benefit awarding means, the awarding of the benefit by the first benefit awarding means can also be performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, a sorting means is provided for alternately sorting the entering balls to one side and the other side, the passage members are arranged in pairs, one of the pair of passage members being the swing A game machine F6 connected to one of the dividing means and the other connected to the other of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 is provided with sorting means for alternately sorting the entered balls to one and the other, and the passage members are disposed in pairs. Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distributing means and the other is connected to the other of the distributing means, balls can be made to enter the passage member one ball at a time. That is, since it can control that a plurality of balls continue in a row and enter the passage member, clogging of the passage member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Distribution Apparatus 700 as an Example>
A gaming machine having a passage member through which a ball can pass, the gaming board having a gaming area formed on the front side, the passage member having a ball entrance disposed on the front side of the gaming board, A game machine G1 characterized in that at least a part of the downstream side of the ball entrance is disposed on the back side of the game board.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (e.g., JP-A-2015-97764). By utilizing the passage (passage member), the ball entering the passage can be reliably sent to a predetermined position. However, when the passage is disposed on the front side of the game board, the space on the front side of the game board is reduced accordingly. That is, the flow area of the ball in the game area is limited (decreased).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the passage member has the ball entrance disposed on the front side of the game board, and at least a portion of the passage downstream of the ball entrance disposed on the back side of the game board Since it is provided, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board by that amount. That is, the flow area of the ball in the game area can be secured.

  In the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the ball entrance and inclined downward toward the one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the gaming board, and is disposed on the back side of the gaming board And a pair of second passages which are respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of which are disposed on the front side of the game board; A game machine G2 characterized in that a winning device is disposed also below the pair of second passages.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the ball entrance and inclined downward toward the one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board It has a pair of inclined passages disposed on the back side of the game board, and a pair of second passages connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of which are disposed on the front side of the game board Because of this, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board (a flow-down area of balls in the game area) by the amount of the inclined passage. Therefore, the winning device can be disposed below the ball entrance and between the pair of second passages. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine G2 is an arrangement which is impossible in the conventional product in which the passage member is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, and like the gaming machine G2, It is possible for the first time by arranging it on the back side of the

  In the gaming machine G2, the second passage is formed as a bending passage in which a bending portion is formed in a part thereof, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the bending portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position at which the ball is made to flow out of the passage into the game area), so the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, if a bend is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the ball in the bend is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through a bend in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the leading ball catches up, and the ball following the leading ball presses against the side wall, so that both can not roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the passage member is provided with an opening formed on the side wall of the bending portion, and therefore the bending portion is passed in a state where a plurality of balls are connected. In this case, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it becomes easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed of a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and in which the first portion and the passing direction of the sphere are different. Means the range to be In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be straightly extending passages, or may be curvilinearly curved extending passages, or May be a channel having a combined shape.

  A gaming machine G4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G3, the opening is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the opening is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, so the glass plate is opened when a ball jam occurs in the bending portion of the second passage. By doing this, on the front side of the game board, it is possible to access the ball clogged at the bending portion from the opening. Therefore, the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and the lower edge of the gaming area A game machine G5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is provided between the portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and the lower edge of the gaming area. Since the gap which can pass is formed, it becomes unnecessary to provide an outlet by each side of the 2nd passage. Accordingly, the space on the front side of the game board (the flow-down area of the ball in the game area) can be secured by that amount, and the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

  In any one of the game machines G2 to G5, the game machine is provided with an attachment member which is formed in a cross-sectional shape in which one side is open and is attached with the open side facing the back of the game board A game machine G6 characterized in that the inclined passage is formed between the back surface and the inner surface of the attachment member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the one side is formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the opening side is attached with the attitude facing the back of the gaming board Since the sloped passage is formed between the back surface of the game board and the inner surface of the attachment member, a mounting member is provided, so that the back side of the game board can be used as part of the sloped path to form the sloped path. It is possible to reduce the number of parts. Thus, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking up-and-down displacement unit 5400 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member; In a gaming machine provided with
An intervening member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member;
When the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving means and the first displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position, a position at which a part of the interposed member regulates the displacement of the second displacement member A game machine H1 characterized by being disposed in

  Here, conventionally, the base member, the first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, the first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and the second displaceable with respect to the first displacement member A gaming machine provided with a displacement member is known (for example, JP-A-2014-23874). According to this gaming machine, the first displacement member disposed in the opening upper portion of the center frame (the upper portion of the gaming machine) is moved to the opening central portion of the center frame (the center of the gaming machine) by the first drive means, The second displacement member can be displaced.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the displacement of the second displacement member is stopped at the upper opening of the center frame, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the gaming machine. By displacing the second displacement member, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, when the second displacing member is disposed on the opening upper portion of the center frame, the member for restricting the displacement of the second displacing member is displaced by a drive unit such as a solenoid to abut, thereby displacing the second displacing member. In this case, it is necessary to newly provide a member and a driving means for restricting displacement, and there is a problem that the number of parts is increased accordingly.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine H1 includes an interposed member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member, the first displacement member being displaced by the first drive means, and the first displacement member being predetermined. When the second displacement member is disposed in the second position, a portion of the interposed member is disposed at a position that restricts the displacement of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving means and the first displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position, a part of the interposed member regulates the displacement of the second displacement member, so that the intervention is provided. It is possible to make the member share the original role and the role of restricting the displacement of the second displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide another portion for restricting the displacement of the second displacement member, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The role of the main body of the interposed member is the role of transmitting the drive of the first drive means to the first displacement member, and the role of connecting the base member and the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine H1, the second displacement member is pivotally supported by the first displacement member and is rotatable about its pivotally supporting portion, and either one of the second displacement member or the interposed member is a side surface. The second displacement member is restricted by displacing the second displacement member by inserting either the second displacement member or the other member inside the recess. The game machine H2 to do.

  Here, if the second displacement member is to be rotationally displaced, the rotation of the second displacement member in one direction can be restricted only by arranging the interposed member in the rotation region of the second displacement member. There is a problem that the rotation of the second displacement member in the other direction (the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotation is restricted) can not be restricted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the second displacement member is pivotally supported by the first displacement member, and is rotatable about its pivotally supported portion as a second displacement. Either the member or the intervening member has a recess recessed in the side surface, and the other of the second displacement member or the intervening member is inserted into the recess, whereby the second displacement member Since the displacement is regulated, when the second displacement member is rotationally displaced, rotational driving in both directions of the second displacement member can be regulated by the interposed member. As a result, the restriction portion of the second displacement member by the interposed member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the interposed member is rotatably disposed relative to the base member, the recess is recessed in the second displacement member, and the interposed member is inserted inside the recess. In the state, the recess has an inner edge formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the interposed member, and the interposed member has a curved shape in which an opposing surface facing the recess is smaller than the arc shape of the recess A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the interposed member is rotatably disposed with respect to the base member, the second displacement member has the recessed portion recessed, and the interposed member is the recessed portion In the state of being inserted inside, the recess has an inner edge formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the interposed member, and the interposed member has a curved shape in which the opposing surface facing the recess is smaller than the arc shape of the recess Since it is formed, when the intervening member is removed from the recess from the state in which the interposing member is inserted inside the recess (that is, the state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the interposing member), Can be pulled out from the recess of the second displacement member without coming into contact with the second displacement member (the restriction of the second displacement member by the insertion member can be released). As a result, the restriction of the displacement of the second displacement member by the interposed member can be easily released.

  Note that the opposing surface facing the recess of the interposed member does not have to be formed in a curved shape on the entire outer edge, and may partially protrude toward the recess, in which case the curve of the locus connecting the projecting portions The shape may be smaller than the arc shape of the recess.

  In the gaming machine H1, the second displacement member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member, and one of the second displacement member and the interposition member is a recess provided on a side surface. When the second displacement member or the other member is inserted into the recess to restrict displacement of the second displacement member, the recess is formed of the second displacement member. A game machine H4 characterized by being recessed on an end face in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction.

  Here, when the second displacement member is slidingly displaced with respect to the first displacement member, the intermediate member is brought into contact with the outer surface in the sliding direction of the first displacement member to restrict displacement of the second displacement member. The displacement of the second displacement member can be regulated when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction approaching the interposed member, but the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the interposed member. There is a problem that the displacement of the displacement member can not be regulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine H1, the second displacement member is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the first displacement member, and the second displacement member or the intervening member Either one has a recess recessed on the side surface, and when the other of the second displacement member or the intervening member is inserted inside the recess, the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted. The recess is recessed on the end face of the second displacement member in the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction, so that when the second displacement member is slidingly displaced, it is possible to regulate the sliding displacement of the second displacement member in both directions. As a result, the restriction portion of the second displacement member by the interposed member can be reduced.

  The gaming machine H1 includes transmission means for transmitting a drive to the second displacement member, and one of the interposed member and the transmission means includes a blocking portion for blocking transmission of the drive by the transmission means. When the member is displaced and the blocking portion abuts on the other of the interposed member or the transmission means, the transmission of the drive from the transmission means to the second displacement member is blocked, and the second displacement member A game machine H5 characterized in that its displacement is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the transmission means for transmitting the drive to the second displacement member is provided, and either the interposed member or the transmission means cuts off the transmission of the drive by the transmission means. The driving member from the transmitting means to the second displacement member is blocked by the contact of the blocking portion with the other of the intervening member or the transmission means, (2) Since the displacement of the displacing member is restricted, the displacement of the transmitting means can be restricted without bringing the interposing member into contact with the transmitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest by the abutment of the interposed member and the second displacement member.

  In the gaming machine H1, the interposed member is rotatably disposed relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is displaceable in the rotational axis direction of the interposed member with respect to the first displacement member. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the second displacement member being in contact with the end face of the interposed member in the rotational axis direction.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the interposed member is rotatably disposed relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is disposed of the interposed member relative to the first displacement member. The displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the second displacement member being disposed so as to be displaceable in the rotation axis direction and the second displacement member abuts on the end surface of the interposed member in the rotation axis direction. When the member abuts, the second displacement member can be pressed against the interposed member in the rotational axis direction of the interposed member. Therefore, in a state in which the interposed member and the second displacement member abut each other (a state in which the displacement of the second displaced member is restricted by the interposed member), the resistance when the interposed member rotates can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress rotation of the interposed member in a state where the interposed member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other.

  The gaming machine H6 includes a second drive unit for driving the second displacement member, and the second drive unit is housed in a main unit that generates a magnetic force by the application of electric power, and is housed inside the main unit. A shaft portion which is displaced to either the inside or the outside of the body portion by the generation of a magnetic force in the body portion; and a biasing means which biases the shaft portion to either the inside or the outside of the body portion. A game machine H7 characterized in that the second displacement member abuts against the interposed member when the shaft portion is displaced by the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H6, the second driving means for transmitting the driving to the second displacement member is provided, and the second driving means is a main body that generates magnetic force by applying electric power. And a shaft which is accommodated in the inside of the main body and generates a magnetic force in the main body and which is displaced to either the inside or the outside of the main body, and which shaft is either inside or outside the main body The second displacement member is in contact with the interposed member when the shaft portion is displaced by the biasing means, and the second biasing member is biased by the biasing force of the biasing means. The state in which the displacement member and the interposed member are in contact can be maintained. As a result, it is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force for restricting the displacement of the interposed member to the second driving means, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the second displacing member abuts on the interposed member to change a displacement mode of the second displacing member.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the second displacement member is in contact with the interposed member, and the displacement form of the second displacement member is changed. There is no need to provide other changing means for changing the form of displacement. As a result, the structure of the second displacement member in the case of providing a plurality of displacement forms can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine H8, the interposed member is rotatably disposed relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is slidably disposed relative to the first displacement member. When the member and the second displacement member abut, and the slide displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the interposed member, the abutting portion of the interposed member and the second displacement member and the interposed member A game machine H9 characterized in that the direction connecting with the rotation axis is set to be the same as the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8, the interposed member is rotatably disposed relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is slidably displaceable relative to the first displacement member. When the interposed member and the second displacement member are in contact and the slide displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the interposed member, the interposed member and the abutting portion of the second displacement member are interposed Since the direction connecting the rotation shaft of the member is set to be the same as the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member, the rotation member of the interposed member is the rotation shaft of the insertion member when the second displacement member abuts on the insertion member It is possible to suppress the rotation of the axis. As a result, the regulation of the slide displacement of the second displacement member by the interposed member can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine H9, at the contact portion between the second displacement member and the intervening member, a projecting portion is provided so as to protrude from either one of the second displacement member or the intervening member, and the second displacement member or via A gaming machine H10 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in one of the other forming members, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion is formed in the same triangular shape in cross section.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H9, a protruding portion protrudes from either the second displacement member or the intervening member at the contact portion between the second displacement member and the intervening member. And the receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in either the second displacement member or the intervening member, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion is formed in the same triangular shape in cross section. When the displacement is regulated by the interposed member, when the placement of the interposed member or the second displacement member is shifted, the receiving portion receives the insertion portion, whereby the insertion portion and the receiving portion are inclined relative to each other. The mounting member or the second displacement member can be moved to an appropriate position. As a result, when the second displacing member is brought into contact with the interposing member in a state in which the interposing member or the second displacing member is displaced, the interposing member can be prevented from rotating.

  In the gaming machine H10, the second displacement member is rotatably disposed about a straight line extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member, and the second displacement member is slidably displaced. The second displacement member is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis by coming into contact with the interposed member, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion formed on the second displacement member has the cross-sectional shape of the second displacement member. A game machine H11 characterized by being formed larger as it is separated in the radial direction from the rotation shaft of the two displacement members.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H10, the second displacement member is rotatably disposed about a straight line extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member. The second displacement member is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis by sliding displacement of the second displacement member into contact with the interposed member, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion formed on the second displacement member has a cross section The shape of the second displacement member increases as it is separated from the rotation shaft of the second displacement member in the radial direction, so when the second displacement member rotates in contact with the interposed member, the second displacement member rotates with the amount of rotation of the second displacement member. The contact area between the projecting portion and the receiving portion can be increased. Therefore, the contact area between the receiving portion and the insertion portion can be maximized at the maximum rotational position of the second displacement member. As a result, the force related to the receiving portion and the inserting portion can be dispersed, and breakage of the second displacement member and the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the interposed member is a rack on which a gear is engraved, and the second displacement member is displaceably disposed in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack. The game machine H12 which features.

  According to the gaming machine H12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the interposed member is a rack on which a gear is engraved, and the second displacement member is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the movement direction of the rack Since it is arranged possible, when the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the rack (intervening member), it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rack due to the impact.

  The gaming machine H12 includes transmission means for transmitting a drive to the second displacement member, the transmission means being connected to the rack, and the displacement of the rack causes the second displacement member to be displaced. Gaming machine H13.

  According to the gaming machine H13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H12, the transmitting means is provided to transmit the drive to the second displacement member, the transmission means is connected to the rack, and the displacement of the rack displaces the second displacement member. As a result, the drive source of the second displacement member does not have to be disposed elsewhere, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  In addition, it is possible to suppress movement of the second displacement member in a state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the rack. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the rack and the second displacement member due to displacement of the second displacement member in a state where the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted due to a malfunction or the like.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking up-and-down displacement unit 5400 as an example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a first displacement member displaced between a retracted position and a first position with respect to the base member, and a second displacement member displaced with respect to the first displacement member.
And a restricting member disposed in a displacement region of the second displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is disposed at the retracted position,
The gaming machine I1 characterized in that the restriction member is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member when the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position.

  Here, conventionally, a base member, a first displacement member displaced with respect to the base member between a retracted position and a first position, and a second displacement member displaced with respect to the first displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known (e.g., JP-A-2014-23874). According to this gaming machine, the first displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be displaced to the first position to displace the second displacement member.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when stopping the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the gaming machine. By displacement of the displacement member, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, it is possible to arrange the second displacement member on the back side of the center frame at the retracted position to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position. There is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced as the frame is enlarged.

  In addition, when the second displacement member is disposed at the retracted position, it is also conceivable to abut a part of the center frame on the second displacement member to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member, but in this case, When it is necessary to allow the displacement of the second displacement member, it is necessary to sufficiently separate the second displacement member from the center frame, and accordingly, the effect area by the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first displacement member is provided with the restriction member disposed in the displacement area of the second displacement member in the state where the first displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. Is displaced in the direction away from the displacement area of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position, the second displacement member is displaced by the amount by which the restriction member is separated from the displacement area of the second displacement member. The restriction member can be moved in a short time outside the displacement region of As a result, the effect area by the displacement of the second displacement member can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine I1, a gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first displacement member is displaceable from a retracted position to a second position in the direction opposite to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the first displacement member is displaceable from the retracted position to the second position in the direction opposite to the first position. The effect area can be formed on both sides of the retracted position. As a result, the effect area by the displacement of the second displacement member can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine I2, the second displacement member is displaced from the restricting position by the restricting member, and the first displacement member is moved from the first position or the second position to the second position or the second position via the retracted position. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that when being displaced to the first position side, the regulating member is disposed outside the movement trajectory of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the second displacement member is displaced from the regulated position by the regulating member, and the first displacement member retracts from either one of the first position or the second position. When the second displacement member is displaced toward the second position or the first position via the position, the restriction member is disposed outside the movement trajectory of the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member moves from the first position side to the second position. When being displaced from the position side or the second position side to the first position side via the retracted position, interference of the second displacement member with the regulating member can be suppressed.

  That is, when the first displacement member is displaced from the first position side to the second position side or from the second position side to the first position side via the retracted position, the second displacement member is disposed at the restricting position In the state, when the first displacement member passes through the retracted position, the second displacement member and the restriction member approach each other. Therefore, when the second displacement member is disposed at a position slightly deviated from the regulated position, or when the second displacement member is displaced due to the vibration of displacement of the first displacement member, the second displacement member may interfere with the regulation member. The second displacing member is displaced from the restraining position so that the restraining member is disposed outside the displacement trajectory of the second displacing member. Therefore, interference between the second displacing member and the restraining member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly displace the first displacement member from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position.

  In the gaming machine I2, the regulating member is displaced in a direction in which the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position or the second position, and a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member. Game machine I4 characterized in that it is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the regulating member is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position or the second position Since the displacement member is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the member, the first displacement member is moved from the retracted position to the first position or the first displacement member while the second displacement member is stopped at the restricted position with respect to the first displacement member. It can be displaced to 2 positions. That is, the control member can be separated from the displacement region of the second displacement member while being displaced in the moving direction of the second displacement member by the displacement of the first displacement member. As a result, the first displacement member can be displaced in both the first position and the second position from the state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the restriction member.

  In the gaming machine I4, the restricting member is rotatable about a straight line extending in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member, and the second displacement member includes a recess recessed on the outer surface, A displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by arranging the radially outer end of the restriction member with respect to the rotation shaft of the restriction member inside the recess.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the regulating member is rotatable around a straight line extending in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is on the outer surface The displacement member of the second displacement member is restricted by the provision of the concave portion recessed and the radially outer end of the restriction member being disposed inside the concave portion with respect to the rotation axis of the restriction member. Can be separated from the displacement region of the second displacement member while displacing the restricting member in the moving direction of the second displacement member by the displacement of the first displacement member only by the operation of rotating the second displacement member. As a result, the first displacement member can be easily displaced in both the first position and the second position from the state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the restriction member.

  The gaming machine I4 comprises a second drive means for driving the second displacement member, the restriction member being disposed in contact with the outer surface of the second displacement member, and the second displacement member being the second drive. A game machine I6 characterized in that when being displaced by the means, it is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member by being pressed against the outer surface of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the second driving means for driving the second displacement member is provided, and the regulating member is disposed in contact with the outer surface of the second displacement member. When the displacement member is displaced by the second drive means, it is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member by being pressed against the outer surface of the second displacement member. The restriction of the displacement can be released by the displacement of the second displacement member by the second drive means. Therefore, since the restriction of the restriction member can be released according to the displacement of the second displacement member by the second drive means, compared to the case where the restriction member is performed by the displacement of the first displacement member, the restriction member is restricted. The release can be performed in a short time. As a result, the effect area by the displacement of the second displacement member can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine I5, the regulation member includes a transmission member to which the drive of rotation in one direction is transmitted to the regulation member, the transmission member is coupled to the first displacement member, and the first displacement member is one A game machine I7 characterized in that the control member is displaced when displaced in the direction, and the control member is not displaced when the first displacement member is displaced in the other direction.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the regulating member is provided with a transmission member to which the drive of rotation in one direction is transmitted to the regulation member, and the transmission member is connected to the first displacement member When the first displacing member is displaced in one direction, the regulating member is displaced, and when the first displacing member is displaced in the other direction, the regulating member is not displaced. It is possible to improve the freedom of regulatory position. As a result, the exercise area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be expanded.

  The gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13 and I1 to I7. A game machine K1 characterized by Among other things, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “A variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided to operate the start operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13 and I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A game machine K2 characterized by a certain feature. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13 and I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it is a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and displacement with respect to the first displacement member There is known a gaming machine having a second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-23874). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the number of parts increases. The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can reduce the number of parts.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 comprises a base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, and a first drive means for driving the first displacement member. A second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member, and further comprising an interposed member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member, the first drive When the first displacement member is displaced by the means and the first displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position, a part of the interposed member is disposed at a position that regulates the displacement of the second displacement member. .
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the second displacement member is pivotally supported by the first displacement member, and is rotatable about the pivotal support portion, Either one of the second displacement member or the intervening member includes a recess that is recessed on the side surface, and the other of the second displacement member or the intervening member is inserted inside the recess, The displacement of the second displacement member is restricted.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the game machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the interposed member is rotatably disposed with respect to the base member, and the concave portion is recessed in the second displacement member. In the state where the interposed member is inserted inside the recessed portion, the recessed portion has an inner edge formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the interposed member, and the interposed member faces the recessed portion The opposing surface is formed in a curved shape smaller than the arc shape of the recess.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of parts can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to reduce the regulated portion.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to easily release the regulation.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 64 first prize mouth (ball opening)
81 3rd Symbol Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
100 to 104 substrate box 410 front base (base member)
416 Support (second axis)
417 projection (1st axis)
430 Displacement member (arm member)
431 Drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441, 9954 Drive motor (drive means, first drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a protrusion (pin part)
450 Decorative member (displacement member)
452 Front base (body member)
452h Contact surface (contact member)
456 gear (transmission means)
457, 8963 Drive motor (second drive means)
491c bulging part (facing member)
492 Roller member (rotary member)
492b Shaft (shaft)
500, 5500, 10500, 13500 Rotation unit (rotation display device, second displacement member)
510 Top base (part of body member)
512, 522 air vents (through holes)
520 Lower surface base (part of body member)
531 Base member (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Radiation control section (seat section)
546 Groove 550 Front cover (transmission part, cover member)
560 Reflector (facing member)
563a Inclined surface (facing member)
570 Rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a first part 621b second part 630 sensor (sensor device)
640a second winning device (winning device)
730 Prize winning member (passage member)
740 Passage member (bending member)
742 Guide (inclined surface)
743 Lower protrusion (bent part)
744 Opening 750 Intermediary member (passage member)
760 Distribution members (passage members, attachment members)
5410 front base (base member)
5430, 9430 Displacement member ( connection member, restriction member)
5438 Receiving part 5450, 6450, 7450, 10450, 11450, 12450, 13450 Decorative member (first displacement member)
5514, 13514 recess
5460 front cover (base member)
6436 Shut-off unit 7910, 8963 Solenoid (second drive means)
7911 body portion 7912 shaft portion 8930, 9930 slide unit (first displacement member)
8940, 9940, rotation unit (second displacement member)
8942c insertion part (protruding part)
9936, 9937, 9938 Transmission gear (transmission means)
9430 Displacement member (rack)
9950 Base unit (base member)
13495 Protruding member (regulating member)
KR1 1st throwing route (vertical passage, 2nd passage)
KR2 2nd throwing route (extension passage, 2nd passage)
KR3 third throwing path (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th ball sending route (part of inclined passage)

Claims (2)

A base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, first drive means for driving the first displacement member, and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member; In a gaming machine provided with
A connecting member you connecting the first displacement member and said base member,
The second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member, and a recess is recessed in either one of the second displacement member or the coupling member.
The first displacement member is displaced by the first drive means, and the first displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position, and either the second displacement member or the coupling member is disposed inside the recess. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement of the second displacement member is formed so as to be regulated. Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein Rukoto comprising a substrate box.

Images